Update author email address.
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
d1e68bce 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2000-09-17
424d8b44 2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
424d8b44
DL
13** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
1fa28578
GM
15** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
19images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20to list them.
6344985d 21
d5483ab1 22** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 23Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
24
25** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
29support 64-bit executables. See etc/MACHINES for instructions.
f4988be7 30
1fa28578
GM
31\f
32* Changes in Emacs 21.1
33
f393cf90
DL
34** Gnus changes.
35
36The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
37four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
38internationalization and mail-fetching.
39
40*** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
41many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
42
43If you used procmail like in
44
45(setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
46(setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
47(setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
48(setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
49
50this now has changed to
51
52(setq mail-sources
53 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
54 :suffix ".in")))
55
56More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
57Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
58
59*** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
60Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
61
62*** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too
63many parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables.
64
65*** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
66called to position point.
67
68*** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
69summary buffers and NOV files.
70
71*** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
72of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
73
74*** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
75subtly different manner.
76
77*** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
78and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
79ever-changing layouts.
80
81*** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
82
83*** There is image support.
84
85** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
d1e68bce
DL
868859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
87more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
88empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
89window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
90on.
91
ba9eeda1
GM
92** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
93set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
94file that is already visited under a different name.
95
42ac0ae5
GM
96** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
97nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
98
99** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
100recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
101signaled.
102
ba9eeda1 103** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
dab96841
DL
104support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
105use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
106buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
107M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
108new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
109
b941a14b 110+++
ba9eeda1 111** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
b941a14b
KH
112and displayes information about that.
113
ba9eeda1 114** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
83b6997f
GM
115file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
116
d7b38c05 117** Polish and German translations of Emacs' reference card have been
6917e6bb 118added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex' and `de-refcard.tex'.
d7b38c05
GM
119Postscript files are included.
120
121** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
122`dired-ref.tex'.
123
25ad1371
GM
124** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
125expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
126
127This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
128determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
129mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
130interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
131regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
132associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
133
424d8b44 134+++
f0298744
DL
135** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
136displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
137menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
138menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
139
9a8d84ca
DL
140** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
141a version-dependent component.
142
d76c03ea
GM
143** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
144Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
145will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
146character is still bound as before.
147
3b4fa1b2
DL
148** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
149using that menu.
150
40e857ea 151** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 152suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 153
beb2eb00 154+++
c08398de
DL
155** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
156buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
157contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
158by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
159insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
160the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
161Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
162
db7a3ede 163+++
3d6cd763
GM
164** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
165coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
166escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
167such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
168recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 169always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 170read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
171(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
172RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 173
0b8a3a6d
DL
174** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
175environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
176
424d8b44 177+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
178** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
179point in a pop-up window.
180
6d35b49f 181+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
182** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
183displays all characters in that character set.
184
185** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
186coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
187
a4067978 188+++
5cb6a58e 189** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978
EZ
190on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
191defined on newcomment.el.
5cb6a58e 192
424d8b44 193+++
a1b8d58b
GM
194** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
195
6e417ca5
DL
196** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
197been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
198
424d8b44 199+++
5898e075
DL
200** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
201`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
202indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
203indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
204
424d8b44 205+++
abfcc168
GM
206** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
207sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 208(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
209You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
210
424d8b44 211+++
cc181e95
GM
212** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
213on the display using several methods
214
424d8b44 215+++
cc181e95
GM
216- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
217a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
218be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
219
424d8b44 220+++
cc181e95
GM
221- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
222equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
223
da4496b6 224- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
225
226- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
227the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
228
424d8b44 229+++
3b4fa1b2 230** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 231an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 232command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 233does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 234
424d8b44 235+++
176256a1 236** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
237`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
238typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 239
dd0add8e
DL
240** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
241characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
242
bf3ba9ac 243+++
699238d9
GM
244** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
245compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
246this behavior.
247
248The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
249compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
250Emacs dump core.
251
424d8b44 252+++
699238d9 253** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 254
7233c5bd
GM
255*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
256whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
257is useful for debugging X problems.
258
259Example:
260
699238d9 261 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 262
100b3cbb
GM
263*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
264visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
265the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
266and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
267visual class names are
268
269 TrueColor
270 PseudoColor
271 DirectColor
272 StaticColor
273 GrayScale
274 StaticGray
275
276Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
277`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
278meaning.
279
280The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
281supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
282`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
283visual.
284
285Example:
286
699238d9 287 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
288
289*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
290specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
291default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
292resource values are `true' or `on'.
293
294Example:
295
699238d9 296 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 297
0d0c76b8
EZ
298** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
299more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
300now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
301
42088c12 302** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 303display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
304shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
305be customized.
c60ea02e 306
424d8b44 307+++
31047e0d
DL
308** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
309
424d8b44 310+++
b02786f9
GM
311** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
312all frames except the selected one.
313
3261c1d8
DL
314** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
315to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
316
ffe36136 317** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
318the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
319MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
320displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
321
0292b49f 322+++
aa78a4f3
EZ
323** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
324MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 325
559cee90
DL
326** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
327read mail from the menu etc.
328
480b5773 329+++
271b4185
GM
330** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
331a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
332
0daee095
GM
333** Changes in Texinfo mode.
334
335** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
336macros
337
338 Key binding Macro
339 -------------------------
340 C-c C-c C-s @strong
341 C-c C-c C-e @emph
342 C-c C-c u @url
343 C-c C-c q @quotation
344 C-c C-c m @email
345
559cee90
DL
346** Changes in Outline mode.
347
348There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
349`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
350the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
351
7a912f63
GM
352** Changes to Emacs Server
353
c0a8c108
EZ
354+++
355*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
356with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
357are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
358Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
359buffers to kill, as before.
360
361Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 362i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
363this way.
364
956777b3
GM
365** Changes to Show Paren mode.
366
367*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
368The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
369use. Default is 1000.
370
f6989277 371+++
404fa7d6
DL
372** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
373groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
374
424d8b44
DL
375+++
376** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
377M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
378M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
379buffers.
8964fec7 380
424d8b44 381+++
39783d73
WP
382** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
383under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
384.emacs file.
385
386The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
387determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
388
d35fce81
GM
389** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
390abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
391`directory-abbrev-alist'.
392
a933dad1
DL
393** Faces and frame parameters.
394
395There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
396Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
397`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
398`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
399sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
400for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
401parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
402
403Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
404`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 405`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
406`default' face and vice versa.
407
d80061fa 408+++
f77a4a8a
GM
409** New face `menu'.
410
411The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
412Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
413attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
414
424d8b44 415+++
a933dad1
DL
416** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
417
418The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
419colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
420correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
421the screen gamma of a frame's display.
422
423PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
424in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
425color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
426
427The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
428`ScreenGamma'.
429
430** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
431
432The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
433Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
434oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
435of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
436the text.
437
438** Emacs has a new face implementation.
439
440The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
441font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
442height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
443These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
444specify a font.
445
446Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
447These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
448under Lisp changes, below.
449
450** New default font is Courier 12pt.
451
424d8b44
DL
452+++
453** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
454of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
455otherwise, it is hollow.
a933dad1
DL
456
457** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
458truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
459foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
460customizing face `fringe'.
461
462** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
463can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
464
465** LessTif support.
466
424d8b44
DL
467Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see <http://www.lesstif.org>).
468You will need a version 0.88.1 or later.
a933dad1
DL
469
470** Toolkit scroll bars.
471
472Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
473LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
474configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
475bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
476bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
477Emacs.
478
479When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
480Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
481Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
482Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
483define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
484`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
485
486Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
487a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
488directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
489different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
490system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
491add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
492
493The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
494`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
495This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
496image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
497Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
498
499** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
500
501When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
502widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
503Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
504
424d8b44 505+++
a933dad1
DL
506** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
507
508When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
509whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
510defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
511highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
512displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
513whitespace.
514
6e612d4d 515+++
a933dad1
DL
516** Busy-cursor.
517
518Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
519display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
520
424d8b44 521+++
a933dad1
DL
522** Blinking cursor
523
524M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
525terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
526and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
527the group `cursor'.
528
529** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
530
531This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
532generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
533See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
534details.
535
536Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
537have to do anything to activate it.
538
539** Tabs and variable-width text.
540
541Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
542defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
543independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
544Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
545
546** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
547
424d8b44 548+++
a933dad1
DL
549*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
550
551 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
552
79dd1637
RS
553The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
554LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 555
79dd1637
RS
556*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
557LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 558
34d90e29 559+++
a933dad1
DL
560** Hscrolling in C code.
561
cc181e95
GM
562Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
563`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
564customized.
a933dad1
DL
565
566** Tool bar support.
567
568Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
569how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
d1e68bce
DL
570Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is displayed.
571To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons
572for specific modes (with copyright assignments).
a933dad1 573
424d8b44 574+++
a933dad1
DL
575** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
576
577Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
578mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
579line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
580about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
581in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
582
583Currently, the following actions have been defined:
584
585- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
586buffers.
587
588- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
589M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
590
591- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
592
424d8b44
DL
593- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
594`*') toggles the status.
a933dad1
DL
595
596- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
597
598** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
599
600When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 601from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
602non-nil.
603
604** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
605
606Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
607Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
608the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
609italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
610Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
611attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
612on terminals.
a933dad1
DL
613
614** Sound support
615
2f516940 616Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 617driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 618supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 619
424d8b44 620+++
a933dad1
DL
621** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
622the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
623forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
624value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
625users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
626even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
627
628The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
629
0e18b431 630+++
a933dad1
DL
631** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
632
633As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
634drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
635`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
636
fdd8bb68 637+++
a933dad1
DL
638** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
639bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
640
641This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
642`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
643variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
644
c5d00c64 645+++
a933dad1
DL
646** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
647
648When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
649value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
650number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 651fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
a933dad1
DL
652
653When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
654value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
655number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 656fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
a933dad1
DL
657
658** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
659notably at the end of lines.
660
661All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
662spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
663
424d8b44 664+++
eee54b0e
DL
665There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
666
a933dad1
DL
667** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
668query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
669after each match to get the replacement text.
670
00782214 671+++
d5483ab1
GM
672** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
673you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 674
424d8b44 675** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
676you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
677lisp-complete-symbol.
678
7af69644 679+++
a933dad1
DL
680** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
681
163ea954
RS
682If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
683longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the minibuffer window unless
684it is on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum minibuffer
685window size by setting the following variable:
a933dad1
DL
686
687- User option: max-mini-window-height
688
689Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
690fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
691specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
692
693Default is 0.25.
694
2f72fd2f
GM
695** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
696
0d43b60d
GM
697** Changes to hideshow.el
698
699Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
700selection and traversal and includes more isearch support.
701
702*** Generalized block selection and traversal
703
704A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
705(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
706which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
707`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
708point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
709(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
710
711If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
712i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
713backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
714the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
715
716*** Isearch support for updating mode line
717
718During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
719blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
720line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
721portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
722is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
723
724To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
725something like this in your .emacs.
726
727 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
728 (lambda ()
729 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
730
559cee90
DL
731** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
732
424d8b44 733+++
1b24b888
GM
734*** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
735an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
559cee90
DL
736log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
737
424d8b44 738+++
1b24b888
GM
739**** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
740current buffer.
424d8b44
DL
741
742+++
1b24b888
GM
743*** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
744in a log file.
eb2aac9d 745
502004be 746+++
1b24b888
GM
747*** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
748entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
eb2aac9d 749
502004be 750+++
1b24b888 751*** Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
424d8b44
DL
752version number is performed based on regular expressions from
753`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
754Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 755
1b24b888
GM
756*** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock
757highlighting.
758
3476b54a
GM
759** Changes in Font Lock
760
761*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
762font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
763mode.
764
b3b98592
GM
765** Comint (subshell) changes
766
66b6c480
MB
767By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp' to
768distiguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which parts of
769the text were output by the process, and which entered by the user, and
770attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use this information.
771Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line, respect field
772boundaries in a fairly natural manner.
773To disable this feature, and use the old behavior, set the variable
774`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields' to a non-nil value.
775
b3b98592
GM
776Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
777and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
778
779The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
780buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
781buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
782
783The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
784M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
785the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
786
8c1bec7c
MB
787Packages based on comint.el like shell-mode, and scheme-interaction-mode
788now highlight user input and program prompts, and support choosing
789previous input with mouse-2. To control these feature, see the
790user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 791
e26cec67
GM
792** Changes to Rmail mode
793
c0510d27
GM
794*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
795set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
796receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
797recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
798`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
799as correspondent.
800
801Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
802mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 803regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 804
3b55acc9
GM
805*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
806to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
807Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
808with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
809for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
810
6a1950ec
GM
811*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
812like `j'.
813
5bb6f079
RS
814*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
815specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 816digest message.
e26cec67 817
993d8b7d
DL
818*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
819in which folder to put messages automatically.
820
400a1ed0
GM
821** Changes to TeX mode
822
823The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
824`latex-mode'.
825
a933dad1
DL
826** Changes to RefTeX mode
827
828*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
829 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
830 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
831 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
832 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
833 can be edited from that buffer.
834
835*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
836 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
837 `A' to use all marked entries).
838
839*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
840 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
841
842*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
843 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
844 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
845 been cited.
846
38de9631
GM
847** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
848The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
849semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
850in column 1 are always made leaves.
851
a933dad1
DL
852** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
853has the following new features:
854
855*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
856may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
857to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
858time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
859
860*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
861feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
862file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
863compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
864pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
865defaults to 1.
866
5d94f558 867** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
868file names.
869
424d8b44 870+++
a933dad1
DL
871** Tooltips.
872
873Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
874mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
875can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
876
877Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
878variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
879the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
880tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
881
424d8b44 882+++
a933dad1
DL
883** Customize changes
884
885*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
886`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
887cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
888
889*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
890Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
891default).
892
0ae51efb
GM
893*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
894between custom options. Example:
895
896 (defcustom default-input-method nil
897 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
898 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
899 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
900 :group 'mule
901 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
902 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
903
904This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
905current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
906first in a custom-set-variables statement.
907
a933dad1
DL
908** New features in evaluation commands
909
5e03eb84 910*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
911modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
912print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
913customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
914eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
915
5e03eb84
GM
916*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
917code when called with a prefix argument.
918
ead53494
GM
919** Ispell changes
920
37d8a691 921+++
bbe15990
EZ
922*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
923transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
924spell-checks the current buffer.
925
37d8a691 926+++
385ff9e3
GM
927*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
928added.
929
930*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
931correction is made and re-checked.
932
74ec6045 933*** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
934
935*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
936cases.
937
938*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
939on syntax errors.
940
941*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
942end of the buffer.
943
a933dad1
DL
944** Dired changes
945
946*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
947command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
948is, delete only empty directories.
949
950*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
951command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
952copy directories recursively.
953
f6737cde
GM
954*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
955in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
956the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
957
2f72fd2f
GM
958*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
959replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
960directory.
961
7381ae05
MB
962*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
963a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
964This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
965will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
966accurate or inaccurate as it is.
967
e024b101
GM
968*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
969from ls switches.
970
a933dad1
DL
971** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
972use the -f option when sending mail.
973
b1c609b1
GM
974** CC mode changes.
975
976Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
977current user setups (although it's believed that these
978incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
979However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
980back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
981compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
982release.
983
7972fcfc
GM
984*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
985This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
986of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
987non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
988want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
989have to bother.
990
991Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
992situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 993and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
994If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
995the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
996by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
997
b1c609b1
GM
998*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
999When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
1000variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
1001take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
1002is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
1003settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
1004possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
1005Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
1006
1007By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
1008special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
1009the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
1010of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
1011above.
1012
1013Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
1014when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
1015function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
1016call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
1017then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
1018values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
1019only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
1020function documentation for more info.
1021
1022The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
1023especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
1024with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
1025intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
1026such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
1027is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
1028configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
1029global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
1030
1031(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
1032
1033**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
1034This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
1035
1036This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
1037variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
1038completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
1039the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
1040empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
1041style system.
1042
1043**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
1044In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
1045c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
1046as far as possible.
1047
1048*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
1049CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
1050surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
1051chapter about this in the manual.
1052
1053**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
1054The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
1055recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
1056primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
1057adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
1058
1059**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
1060This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
1061c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
1062
1063**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
1064This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
1065
1066It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
1067Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
1068A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
1069inside CC Mode.
1070
1071Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
1072causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
1073the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
1074available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
1075cc-mode/).
1076
1077**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
1078The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
1079specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
1080literals.
1081
1082**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
1083It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
1084prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
1085you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1086this function.
1087
1088*** Fixes to IDL mode.
1089It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1090to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1091struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1092Thanks to Eric Eide.
1093
1094*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1095It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1096opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1097
1098**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1099
1100*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1101See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1102better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1103and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1104
1105*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1106previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1107the column specified by comment-column.
1108
1109*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1110In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1111is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1112prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1113contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1114don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1115
1116*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1117instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1118arguments.
1119
1120*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1121
1122*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1123c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1124c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1125variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1126Provan).
1127
1128*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1129
c407c570
GM
1130** Makefile mode changes
1131
1132*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1133
5d94f558 1134*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1135Fontlock mode is active.
1136
87be76f6
GM
1137** Isearch changes
1138
3353ef5a
GM
1139*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1140so that searches can be resumed.
1141
1142*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1143respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1144that started the search.
1145
87be76f6 1146*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1147selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1148
c8a8458a 1149+++
87be76f6
GM
1150*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1151
d35fce81 1152Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1153`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1154search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1155before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1156highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1157`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1158
1159The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1160will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1161Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1162using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1163usual snappy response.
1164
1165If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1166matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1167set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1168isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1169
21bc6203 1170+++
35384f06
GM
1171** Changes in sort.el
1172
1173The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1174as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
21bc6203 1175new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
35384f06 1176numeric base.
87be76f6 1177
d7b511c4
GM
1178** Changes to Ange-ftp
1179
424d8b44 1180+++
d7b511c4 1181*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1182names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1183sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1184
d7b511c4
GM
1185*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1186ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1187
9d453139
SS
1188*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1189output ^M at the end of lines.
1190
4b9347b3
GM
1191** Shell script mode changes.
1192
1193Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1194derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1195sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1196
79214ddf
FP
1197** Etags changes.
1198
1199*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1200
aca0be23 1201*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1202possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1203{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1204This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1205a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1206
79214ddf
FP
1207*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1208declarations when given the --declarations option.
1209
1210*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1211"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1212
1213*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1214types.
1215
de370c4c 1216*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1217
1218*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1219
1220*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1221are now tagged.
1222
1223*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1224variables are tagged.
1225
1226*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1227
8dc78b52
FP
1228*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1229for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1230
c8d94f86 1231+++
f6737cde
GM
1232** Changes in etags.el
1233
3f6e4b8b
GM
1234*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1235tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1236is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1237
f6737cde
GM
1238*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1239the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1240
1241If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1242FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1243TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1244obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1245
1246TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1247
1248FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1249List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1250
1251A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1252
1253 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1254 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1255 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1256
1257*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1258of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1259
1260*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1261names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1262
424d8b44 1263+++
fbc164de
PE
1264** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1265and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1266LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1267
c3eb1f10 1268+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
1269** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1270Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
12718859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
f6499c03
DL
1272GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet; there are basic 8859-14 and
12738859-15 fonts at <URL:http://czyborra.com/charsets/> and recent X
1274releases have 8859-15. There are new Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix
1275(only) and Polish slash input methods in Leim.
59c1bf85 1276
424d8b44 1277+++
163ea954 1278** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1279remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1280appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1281
1282** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1283
424d8b44 1284+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1285** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1286
6ab8d72d 1287+++
f6499c03 1288** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
c0510d27
GM
1289containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1290expression from that list, are not checked.
1291
5d94f558
SS
1292** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1293When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1294and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1295the buffer, just like for the local files.
1296
dc28878c
GM
1297** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1298
df8a9f78 1299+++
95931eb1
GM
1300** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
1301displays local abbrevs, only.
1302
54baed30
GM
1303** VC Changes
1304
1305VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
1306easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
1307Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
1308to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
1309changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
1310`vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of atoms that identify
1311version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
1312each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
1313file is registered in that backend.
1314
1315When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
1316backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
1317directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
1318master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
1319the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
1320As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
1321
1322The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
1323still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
1324RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
1325vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
1326where it doesn't make sense.)
1327
1328The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
1329obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
1330`CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
1331
1332*** General Changes
1333
1334The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
1335checks are always done now.
1336
1337VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
1338operations.
1339
1340*** Changes for CVS
1341
1342There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
1343default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
1344remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
1345by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
1346regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
1347that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
1348queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
1349
1350If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
1351repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
1352If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
1353commit, you can either use C-u C-x v m to perform an update on the
1354current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
1355entire directory tree.
1356
1357The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
1358"cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
1359is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
1360"watched" by other developers.)
1361
1362*** Lisp Changes in VC
1363
1364VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
1365add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
1366library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
1367then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
1368a version system named FOO, you write a library named vc-foo.el, which
1369provides a number of functions vc-foo-... (see commentary at the end
1370of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
1371you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the atom
1372`FOO' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
1373
a933dad1
DL
1374** New modes and packages
1375
ff332647 1376+++
90cbf47e
GM
1377*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1378intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1379typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1380on certain projects.
1381
894ca69e 1382+++
90cbf47e 1383*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1384regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1385
d96d6bb0 1386 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1387
1388will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1389face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1390typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1391Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1392appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1393current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1394corresponding file is read.
1395
424d8b44 1396+++
d96d6bb0 1397*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1398Emacs is idle.
1399
31fc5d15
GM
1400*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1401parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1402
5cb6a58e
SM
1403*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1404package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1405be more robust while offering the same functionality.
1406
424d8b44 1407+++
578979ee
GM
1408*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1409facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1410separate Texinfo file.
1411
424d8b44
DL
1412+++
1413*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1414by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1415provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1416`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1417enter checkin log messages.
dc1178bf 1418
424d8b44 1419+++
6abca616
EZ
1420*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1421without invoking external programs.
1422
1423The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1424and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1425`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1426is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1427Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1428
1429The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1430page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1431
719e2c6e 1432+++
5e5dff44
GM
1433*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1434authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1435
1436The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1437the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1438the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1439Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1440even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1441single step.
1442
1443On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1444matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1445probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1446contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1447
424d8b44 1448+++
f7136ee8
GM
1449*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1450unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1451actually modifying content of a buffer.
1452
bbd9b566
GM
1453*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1454PostScript.
1455
1456Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1457
1458The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1459
1460 ; comment (until end of line)
1461 A non-terminal
1462 "C" terminal
1463 ?C? special
1464 $A default non-terminal
1465 $"C" default terminal
1466 $?C? default special
1467 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1468 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1469 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1470 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1471 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1472 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1473 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1474 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1475 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1476 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1477 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1478 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1479 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1480 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1481 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1482
1483Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1484
99453a38
GM
1485*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1486align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1487determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1488example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1489equal signs of assignments.
1490
424d8b44 1491+++
559cee90
DL
1492*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1493paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1494
424d8b44 1495+++
6448a6b3
GM
1496*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1497list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1498buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1499customize the package.
1500
6344985d
GM
1501*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1502
249652b1
GM
1503*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1504replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1505is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1506and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1507not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1508which answers different needs.
1509
424d8b44 1510+++
3476b54a
GM
1511*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1512suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1513expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1514course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1515reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1516to be enabled.
1517
424d8b44 1518+++
8964fec7
SM
1519*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1520containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1521
424d8b44 1522+++
a933dad1
DL
1523*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1524
424d8b44 1525+++
a933dad1
DL
1526*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1527
1528*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1529
1530*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1531Pascal) language.
1532
f6499c03 1533+++
a933dad1
DL
1534*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1535the text at point.
1536
1537*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1538
424d8b44 1539+++
8d54eb69
DL
1540*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1541
a933dad1
DL
1542*** whitespace.el ???
1543
ebcfda83
GM
1544*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1545files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1546(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1547interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1548often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1549uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1550codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1551
1552*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1553
1554Here is an example of columns:
1555
1556horse apple bus
1557dog pineapple car EXTRA
1558porcupine strawberry airplane
1559
1560Doing the following settings:
1561
1562 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1563 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1564 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1565 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1566
1567
1568Selecting the lines above and typing:
1569
1570 M-x delimit-columns-region
1571
1572It results:
1573
1574[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1575[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1576[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1577
1578delim-col has the following options:
1579
1580 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1581 before all columns.
1582
1583 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1584 between each column.
1585
1586 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1587 after all columns.
1588
1589 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1590 each column.
1591
1592delim-col has the following commands:
1593
1594 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1595 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1596
424d8b44 1597+++
f507826c 1598*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1599were operated on recently.
1600
1601M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1602
31fc5d15
GM
1603M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1604recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1605
31fc5d15
GM
1606M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1607filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1608file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1609
31fc5d15
GM
1610- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1611- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1612- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1613
31fc5d15
GM
1614The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1615dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1616
8062f458
DL
1617*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1618text.
1619
424d8b44 1620+++
36e24b82 1621*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1622of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1623specific to Message mode.
1624
424d8b44 1625+++
36e24b82
DL
1626*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1627viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1628with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1629
424d8b44 1630+++
aaa659ef
DL
1631*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1632interface to access directory servers using different directory
1633protocols. It has a separate manual.
1634
eee54b0e
DL
1635*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1636for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1637
424d8b44 1638+++
612839b6
GM
1639*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1640
5d94f558 1641*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 1642minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1643
399da7e3
DL
1644*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1645with the diary features.
1646
6e417ca5
DL
1647*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1648numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1649
4a27bdfb
GM
1650*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1651Fill mode.
1652
a933dad1
DL
1653** Withdrawn packages
1654
1655*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1656functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1657
3261c1d8
DL
1658*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1659
1660*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1661
1662\f
1663* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
1664(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
1665
47e351a3
GM
1666** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
1667with the more general `:mask' property.
1668
ba9eeda1
GM
1669** Image specifications accept more `:algorithm's.
1670
a2bd77b8
GM
1671** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
1672backslash.
1673
424d8b44
DL
1674+++
1675** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
1676is running in batch mode. For example,
1677
1678 (message "%s" (read t))
1679
1680will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
1681to standard output.
1682
1683+++
1684** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
1685`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
1686
ead53494
GM
1687** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
1688will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
1689frame or window.
1690
f6499c03 1691+++
27848c01
GM
1692** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
1693were added
1694
1695- Function: remove ELT SEQ
1696
1697Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
1698a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
1699
1700- Function: remq ELT LIST
1701
1702Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
1703comparison is done with `eq'.
1704
1705** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 1706
b548072f
GM
1707** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
1708has been changed.
1709
424d8b44 1710+++
07b14857
KH
1711** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
1712without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
1713convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
1714
9662da0b
GM
1715** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
1716or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 1717
7fce7efb
DL
1718** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
1719function was declared obsolete.
1720
5d94f558 1721** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
1722retained as an alias).
1723
f98d3086
SM
1724** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
1725It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
1726is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
1727
87efd256
GM
1728** The new function `window-list' has been defined
1729
1730- Function: window-list &optional WINDOW MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES
1731
1732Return a list of windows in canonical order. The parameters WINDOW,
1733MINIBUF and ALL-FRAMES are defined like for `next-window'.
1734
67c9a1d2
GM
1735** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
1736
1737- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
1738
1739Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
1740
1741This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
1742calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
1743argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
1744value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
1745returned.
1746
1747Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
1748if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
1749it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
1750minibuffer even if it is active.
1751
1752Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
1753counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
1754too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
1755and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
1756`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
1757entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
1758
1759ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
1760ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
1761ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
1762ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
1763ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
1764If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
1765Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
1766
ead53494
GM
1767** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
1768event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
1769argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 1770
25fa6deb
GM
1771** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
1772call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
1773message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
1774Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 1775
5d94f558 1776** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
1777meaning no limit.
1778
5d94f558 1779** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
1780coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
1781DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
1782
80c05bd3 1783** The function `subr-arity' provides information on the argument list
de370c4c
DL
1784of a primitive.
1785
80c05bd3
DL
1786** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
1787buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
1788This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
1789than replacing the local map.
1790
4bc7a543
DL
1791** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
1792after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
1793
1794** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
1795
f6499c03 1796+++
f0298744
DL
1797** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, as
1798promised long ago.
1799
5d94f558 1800** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
a933dad1
DL
1801\f
1802* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1803
1804Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1805--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1806When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1807so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1808
85c75536
MB
1809*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
1810buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
1811the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
1812restriction to be restored incorrectly.
1813
0b8a3a6d
DL
1814*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
1815`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
1816when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
1817multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
1818
1819*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
1820`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
1821contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
1822
1823*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
1824changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
1825[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
1826regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
1827the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
1828extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
1829bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
1830eight-bit-graphic.
1831
1832** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
1833
1834A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
1835a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
1836character set as previously.
1837
1838*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
1839They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
1840modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
1841
1842CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
1843characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
1844range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
1845case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
1846
1847FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
1848name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
1849
1850*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
1851registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
1852"fontset-default".
1853
1854*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
1855argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
1856
1857** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
1858composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
1859buffers and strings.
1860
1861*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
1862character' which is an independent character with a unique character
1863code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
1864have been deleted: composite-char-component,
1865composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
1866composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
1867The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
1868also been deleted.
1869
1870*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
1871specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
1872`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
1873
1874*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
1875MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
1876composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
1877may differ between buffer and string text.
1878
1879*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
1880COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
1881
1882*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
1883directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
1884Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
1885`composition' from STRING.
1886
1887*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
1888a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
1889
1890*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
1891obsolete.
1892
1893** The new character set `mule-unicode-0100-24ff' is introduced for
1894Unicode characters of the range U+0100..U+24FF. Currently, this
1895character set is not used.
1896
1897** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
1898`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
1899X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
1900
1901+++
1902** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
1903are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 19040xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 1905
399da7e3 1906+++
f0124b4a
DL
1907** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
1908that offset in the file before writing.
1909
f98d3086
SM
1910** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
1911compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 1912
612839b6
GM
1913** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
1914`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
1915from which the command was issued.
1916
1917** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
1918`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
1919`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
1920additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
1921operate on.
1922
271b4185
GM
1923** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
1924to `window-buffer-height'.
1925
1926- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
1927
1928Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
1929The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
1930lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
1931
1932Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
1933respectively.
1934
1935If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
1936COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
1937
1938The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
1939obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
1940on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
1941
1942Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
1943buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
1944possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
1945is currently displayed in some window.
1946
3c30cb6e
DL
1947** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
1948argument function's results.
1949
62f20204
GM
1950** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
1951signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
1952
c0510d27
GM
1953** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
1954header is the list of headers passed to it.
1955
1956** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
1957ignores differences in case and text representation.
1958
1959** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
1960cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
1961as follows:
1962
1963 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
1964 nil don't display a cursor
1965 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
1966 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
1967 others display a box cursor.
1968
9a0dd3dc
GM
1969** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
1970an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
1971defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
1972set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
1973
d7b511c4 1974** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 1975specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
1976the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
1977text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
1978
1979Example:
1980
1981 (string-to-syntax "()")
1982 => (4 . 41)
1983
1fa28578
GM
1984** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
1985other than 10.
1986
1987*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
1988INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
1989
5d94f558 1990 #b1111
1fa28578 1991 => 15
5d94f558 1992 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
1993 => -15
1994
1995*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
1996
5d94f558 1997 #o666
1fa28578
GM
1998 => 438
1999
2000*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
2001
5d94f558 2002 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
2003 => 48815
2004
2005*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
2006
5d94f558 2007 #2R-111
1fa28578 2008 => -7
5d94f558 2009 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
2010 => 267
2011
3d4ff2dd 2012** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 2013the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
2014and isn't a string.
2015
3d4ff2dd
GM
2016** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
2017a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
2018value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
2019not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
2020
16ce590d
DL
2021+++
2022** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
2023
73825616 2024** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
2025for a regexp in a string.
2026
2027** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
2028`mouse-position-function'.
2029
723e779c
GM
2030** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
2031that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
2032
d1e103b2
GM
2033** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2034Keywords are now always considered constants.
2035
31047e0d
DL
2036+++
2037** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
2038returns it.
2039
7a85e4df
GM
2040** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
2041returned by function `recent-keys'.
2042
02b14400
RS
2043+++
2044** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
2045can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
2046Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
2047etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
2048mode.
404fa7d6 2049
02b14400 2050+++
8964fec7
SM
2051** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
2052and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
2053
02b14400
RS
2054+++
2055** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
2056has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
2057function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
2058returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
2059been performed."
2060
2061When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
2062and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
2063hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
2064then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 2065
02b14400 2066+++
81da8b32
GM
2067** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
2068In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
2069and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
2070
02b14400 2071+++
9e207b90
GM
2072** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
2073with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
2074specified table.
2075
2076 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
2077
2078Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
2079TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
2080saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
2081what BODY returns.
9e207b90 2082
02b14400 2083+++
d7f89643 2084** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 2085Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 2086
02b14400 2087+++
dde9e75a
GM
2088** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
2089removed since it wasn't used by anything.
2090
02b14400 2091+++
9da30515
GM
2092** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
2093instead of being optional.
2094
02b14400 2095+++
d20679eb
GM
2096** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
2097modify read-only text.
2098
02b14400 2099+++
fbc164de
PE
2100** New functions and variables for locales.
2101
2102The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
2103decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
2104time functions like strftime. The new variables
2105`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
2106locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
2107
2108The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
2109environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
2110the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
2111environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
2112not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
2113`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
2114`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 2115
02b14400 2116+++
863476d1
SM
2117** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
2118To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
2119modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
2120start sequences.
2121
02b14400 2122+++
ef6d912c
GM
2123** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
2124because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
2125
02b14400 2126+++
a933dad1
DL
2127** New function `propertize'
2128
2129The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
2130strings with text properties.
2131
2132- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
2133
2134Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
2135by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
2136PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
2137specified value of that property. Example:
2138
2139 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
2140
2141+++
2142** push and pop macros.
2143
02b14400
RS
2144Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
2145are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
2146as the place that holds the list to be changed.
2147
2148(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
2149(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
2150 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
2151
02b14400
RS
2152** New dolist and dotimes macros.
2153
6c7fd5aa
RS
2154Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
2155are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
2156
2157(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
2158 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
2159 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
2160 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2161
2162(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
2163 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
2164 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
2165 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2166
a933dad1
DL
2167+++
2168** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
2169as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
2170
2171[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
2172[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
2173[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
2174[:blank:] matches space and tab only
2175[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
2176 space, and DEL.
2177[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
2178 and DEL.
2179[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
2180 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2181 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2182[:alpha:] matches letters.
2183 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2184 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2185[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2186[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2187[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2188[:punct:] matches punctuation.
2189 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2190 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2191[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2192[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2193[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2194
2195+++
2196** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2197
2198The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2199
2200- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2201
2202The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2203are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2204
2205:test TEST
2206
2207TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2208Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2209it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2210
2211:size SIZE
2212
2213SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2214many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2215
2216:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2217
2218REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2219full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2220size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
22211.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2222old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2223
2224:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2225
2226THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2227hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2228(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2229
2230:weakness WEAK
2231
b548072f
GM
2232WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2233`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2234`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2235collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2236outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2237
2238- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2239
2240Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2241
2242- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2243
2244Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2245
2246- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2247
2248Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2249values are shared.
2250
2251- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2252
2253Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2254
2255- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2256
2257Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2258
2259- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2260
2261Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2262
2263- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2264
2265Returns the size of TABLE.
2266
d96d6bb0 2267- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2268
2269Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2270
2271- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2272
2273Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2274
2275- Function: clrhash TABLE
2276
2277Clear TABLE.
2278
2279- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2280
2281Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2282not found.
2283
79214ddf 2284- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2285
2286Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2287another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2288
2289- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2290
2291Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2292
2293- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2294
2295Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2296arguments KEY and VALUE.
2297
2298- Function: sxhash OBJ
2299
2300Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2301
2302- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2303
2304Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2305a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2306comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2307and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2308of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2309
2310TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2311
2312HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2313code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2314integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2315
2316Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2317be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2318
2319 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2320 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2321
2322 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2323 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2324
79214ddf 2325 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2326 'case-fold-string-hash))
2327
2328 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2329
2330+++
2331** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2332
2333It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2334circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2335a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2336
2337+++
2338** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2339
2340If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2341#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2342
a933dad1
DL
2343+++
2344** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2345t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2346specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2347is too short to reach that column.
2348
2349+++
2350** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2351now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2352after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2353two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2354
2355If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2356perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2357and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2358
2359+++
2360** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2361to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2362
2363+++
2364** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2365calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2366
2367+++
2368** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2369directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2370small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2371small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2372temporary-file-directory instead.
2373
2374+++
2375** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2376the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2377`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2378hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2379
2380+++
2381** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2382elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2383
2384+++
2385** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2386
2387make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2388creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2389ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2390
2391+++
2392** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2393
2394The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2395on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2396is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2397never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2398ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2399overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2400
2401If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2402that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2403to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2404The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2405
2406+++
2407** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2408
2409Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2410If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2411ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2412result string.
2413
2414Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2415string where arguments appear in the result string.
2416
2417Example:
2418
2419 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2420 (s2 "world"))
2421 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2422 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2423 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2424
2425results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2426
2427+++
2428** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2429
2430Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2431The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2432argument in it.
2433
2434 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2435 (arg "world"))
2436 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2437 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2438 (message msg arg))
2439
2440+++
2441** Sound support
2442
2443Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2444(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2445
2446Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2447(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2448to enable sound support.
2449
2450Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2451list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2452when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2453functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2454sound to play, before playing the sound.
2455
2456The following sound properties are supported:
2457
2458- `:file FILE'
2459
2460FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2461searched relative to `data-directory'.
2462
6fb40beb
GM
2463- `:data DATA'
2464
2465DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2466may be present, but not both.
2467
a933dad1
DL
2468- `:volume VOLUME'
2469
2470VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
24710..1. This property is optional.
2472
2473Other properties are ignored.
2474
2475** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
2476
2477** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2478a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2479
2480** Changes to garbage collection
2481
2482*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2483of live and free strings.
2484
2485*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2486strings that have been consed so far.
2487
a933dad1 2488\f
04545643
GM
2489* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2490Lisp Manual
2491
82a452c8
GM
2492*** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
2493
9a8d84ca
DL
2494+++
2495** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2
GM
2496
2497** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2498image.
2499
2500- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2501
2502Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2503
2504SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2505measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2506character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2507font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2508FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2509
ebb8f116
GM
2510** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
2511has a mask bitmap.
2512
2513- Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
2514
2515Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
2516FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
2517or omitted means use the selected frame.
2518
f6499c03 2519+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
2520** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2521satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2522
2523+++
2524** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2525optional.
2526
f6499c03
DL
2527+++
2528** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
2529below).
04545643
GM
2530
2531\f
a933dad1
DL
2532* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2533
2534Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2535--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2536When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2537so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2538
f6d3257b
GM
2539** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2540to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2541
2542Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2543text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2544is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2545your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2546laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2547just display it black instead.
2548
2549This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2550a line like
2551
2552 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
2553
2554in your `.emacs'.
2555
a933dad1
DL
2556** New face implementation.
2557
2558Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2559font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2560
2561+++
2562*** New faces.
2563
2564Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2565
2566 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 2567
a933dad1
DL
2568 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2569 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 2570
a933dad1 2571 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 2572
a933dad1 2573 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 2574
a933dad1 2575 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 2576
a933dad1 2577 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 2578
a933dad1
DL
2579 7. Background color.
2580
2581 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2582
2583 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2584
2585 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2586
2587 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2588
2589 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2590 color.
2591
2592 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
2593 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
2594
2595Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
2596same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
2597frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
2598faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
2599with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
2600attributes mentioned above.
2601
2602There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
2603definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
2604created frames.
79214ddf 2605
a933dad1
DL
2606A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
2607have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
2608`fully-specified'.
2609
2610+++
2611*** Face merging.
2612
2613The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
2614combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
2615aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
2616properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
2617that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
2618results in a fully-specified face.
2619
2620+++
2621*** Face realization.
2622
2623After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
2624merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
2625realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
2626available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
2627face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
2628cache of the frame on which it was realized.
2629
2630Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
2631character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
2632for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
2633charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
2634
2635Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
2636specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
2637being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
2638the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
2639statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
2640
2641In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
2642`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
26430x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
2644the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
2645initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
2646Emacs.
2647
2648Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
2649`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
2650registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
2651with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
2652
2653++++
2654**** Clearing face caches.
2655
2656The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
2657on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
2658unused fonts.
2659
2660+++
2661*** Font selection.
79214ddf 2662
a933dad1
DL
2663Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
2664given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
2665for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
2666
2667If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
2668pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
2669family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
2670property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
2671an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
2672
2673Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
2674against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
2675match for the given face attributes in this font list.
2676
2677Font selection can be influenced by the user.
2678
2679The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
2680attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
2681face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
2682names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
2683that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
2684width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
2685to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
2686
2687Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
2688specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
2689face doesn't exist.
2690
2691+++
2692**** Scalable fonts
2693
2694Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
2695since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
2696servers.
2697
2698To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 2699`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
2700scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
2701Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
2702scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
2703that list. Example:
2704
2705 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
2706
2707allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
2708
2709+++
2710*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
2711
2712- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
2713
2714Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
2715is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
2716string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
2717
2718If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
2719the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
2720FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
2721POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
2722SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
2723These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
2724if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
2725REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
2726the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
2727of the face font sort order.
2728
79214ddf 2729- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
2730
2731Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
2732omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
2733(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
2734non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
2735
2736- Variable: font-list-limit
2737
2738Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
2739won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
2740matching font. The default is currently 100.
2741
2742+++
2743*** Setting face attributes.
2744
2745For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
2746with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
2747implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
2748`face-attribute'.
2749
2750Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
2751symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
2752
2753The following attributes are recognized:
2754
2755`:family'
2756
2757VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
2758or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
2759and `?' are allowed.
2760
2761`:width'
2762
2763VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
2764It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
2765`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
2766`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
2767
2768`:height'
2769
787345ff
MB
2770VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
2771in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
2772scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
2773height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
a933dad1
DL
2774
2775`:weight'
2776
2777VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
2778symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
2779`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
2780
2781`:slant'
2782
2783VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
2784symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
2785`reverse-oblique'.
2786
2787`:foreground', `:background'
2788
2789VALUE must be a color name, a string.
2790
2791`:underline'
2792
2793VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
2794VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
2795a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
2796don't underline.
2797
2798`:overline'
2799
2800VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
2801VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
2802string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
2803overline.
2804
2805`:strike-through'
2806
2807VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
2808striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
2809face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
2810is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
2811
2812`:box'
2813
2814VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
2815around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
2816VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
2817of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
2818and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
2819VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
2820:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
2821the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
2822specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
2823defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
2824the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2825color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
2826should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
2827like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
2828that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
2829the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
2830box.
2831
2832`:inverse-video'
2833
2834VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
2835inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
2836
2837`:stipple'
2838
2839If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
2840The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
2841searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
2842HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
2843is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
2844explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
2845
2846For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
2847and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
2848
2849`:font'
2850
2851Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
2852XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
2853is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
2854versions of Emacs.
2855
2856For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
2857be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
2858must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
2859
2860Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
2861`defface'.
2862
787345ff
MB
2863`:inherit'
2864
2865VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
2866of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
2867like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
2868
a933dad1
DL
2869*** Face attributes and X resources
2870
2871The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
2872from X resources:
2873
2874 Face attribute X resource class
2875-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2876 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
2877 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
2878 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
2879 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
2880 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
2881 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
2882 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
2883 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
2884 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
2885 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
2886 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
2887 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
2888 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 2889 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
2890 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
2891 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2892 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
2893 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
2894 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2895
2896+++
2897*** Text property `face'.
2898
2899The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
2900specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
2901specification can be
2902
29031. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
2904
29052. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
2906 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
2907 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
2908 for face attribute names.
2909
29103. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
2911 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
2912 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
2913
2914+++
2915** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
2916
acf3ecb7
EZ
2917The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
2918on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
2919the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 2920default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 2921`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
2922used to clear the mapping table.
2923
acf3ecb7
EZ
2924** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
2925
2926The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
2927and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
2928type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
2929color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
2930display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
2931old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
2932`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
2933compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
2934should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
2935modify their color-related behavior.
2936
2937The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
2938any frame type.
2939
8a5719f0
EZ
2940** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
2941
2942The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
2943`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
2944`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
2945`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
2946`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
2947`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
2948display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
2949the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
2950platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
2951
a933dad1
DL
2952+++
2953** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 2954
463cac2d 2955This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
2956
2957The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
2958end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
2959Otherwise, it returns zero.
2960
463cac2d
GM
2961** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
2962
2963There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
2964buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 2965property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 2966
9a9dfda8 2967Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 2968forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 2969to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 2970not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
2971commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
2972boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
2973`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
2974functions.
463cac2d
GM
2975
2976Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 2977a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 2978editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 2979
9a9dfda8
GM
2980The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
2981
59927f88 2982- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
2983
2984Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 2985
9a9dfda8
GM
2986A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2987If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
2988constrained position if that is is different.
2989
2990If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
2991positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
2992ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 2993constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
2994as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2995is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
2996fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
2997the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
2998also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
2999
3000If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
3001NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
3002unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
3003C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
3004only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
3005
59927f88
MB
3006If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
3007a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
3008
3009Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
3010
3011- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 3012
59927f88 3013Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 3014A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3015If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3016
3017- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3018
3019Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
3020A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3021If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3022If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
3023field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
3024
3025- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3026
3027Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
3028A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3029If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3030If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
3031then the end of the *following* field is returned.
3032
3033- Function: field-string &optional POS
3034
3035Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
3036A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3037If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3038
3039- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
3040
3041Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
3042A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3043If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 3044
a933dad1
DL
3045+++
3046** Image support.
3047
3048Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
3049strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
3050(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
3051replaces the display of the characters having that property.
3052
3053If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
3054`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
3055AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
3056window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
3057area.
3058
3059IMAGE is an image specification.
3060
3061*** Image specifications
3062
3063Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
3064is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
3065specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
3066symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
3067described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
3068
3069The following is a list of properties all image types share.
3070
3071`:ascent ASCENT'
3072
576da55d
GM
3073ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
3074If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 3075to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
3076
3077If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
3078image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
3079
5d94f558 3080If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
3081centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
3082of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
3083overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
3084
3085`:margin MARGIN'
3086
79214ddf 3087MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
3088margin around the image. Default is 0.
3089
3090`:relief RELIEF'
3091
3092RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
3093around an image.
3094
3095`:algorithm ALGO'
3096
47e351a3
GM
3097Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
3098
3099ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
3100edge-detection algorithm to the image.
3101
3102ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
3103apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
3104nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
3105position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
3106around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
3107neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
3108transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
3109x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
3110below.
3111
3112 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
3113 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
3114 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
3115
3116The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
3117resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
3118multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
3119of the factors' absolute values.
3120
3121Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
a933dad1 3122
47e351a3
GM
3123 (1 0 0
3124 0 0 0
3125 9 9 -1)
3126
3127Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
3128
3129 ( 2 -1 0
3130 -1 0 1
3131 0 1 -2)
3132
ba9eeda1
GM
3133ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
3134``disabled''.
3135
47e351a3
GM
3136`:mask MASK'
3137
3138If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
3139the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
3140image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
3141background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
3142image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from the corners is
3143the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
3144GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
3145image.
a933dad1 3146
47e351a3
GM
3147If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
3148in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
3149`:mask nil'.
a933dad1
DL
3150
3151`:file FILE'
3152
3153Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
3154search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
3155building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
3156may be present in the image specification.
3157
518df5c4
GM
3158`:data DATA'
3159
3160Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
3161supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
3162present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
3163support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
3164
a933dad1
DL
3165*** Supported image types
3166
b246b1f6 3167**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
3168
3169XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
3170properties supported are
3171
3172`:foreground FG'
3173
3174FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3175is the frame's foreground.
3176
3177`:background FG'
3178
3179BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3180the frame's background color.
3181
3182XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
3183case, the image specification must contain the following properties
3184instead of a `:file' property.
3185
3186`:width WIDTH'
3187
3188WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
3189
3190`:height HEIGHT'
3191
3192HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
3193
3194`:data DATA'
3195
3196DATA must be either
3197
3198 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
3199 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
3200
3201 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
3202
3203 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
3204 bitmap.
3205
c76e04a8
GM
3206 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
3207 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
3208 in the file.
3209
a933dad1
DL
3210**** XPM, image type `xpm'
3211
3212XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
3213`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
3214found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
3215`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
3216
3217Additional image properties supported are:
3218
3219`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
3220
3221SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
3222name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
3223name.
3224
3225XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
3226add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
3227
a933dad1
DL
3228The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
3229to display compressed images.
3230
3231**** PBM, image type `pbm'
3232
3233PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
3234mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
3235defined.
3236
3237**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
3238
3239Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
3240package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
3241are:
3242
a933dad1
DL
3243**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
3244
3245Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
3246package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3247properties defined.
3248
3249**** GIF, image type `gif'
3250
3251Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3252`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3253
3254Additional image properties supported are:
3255
3256`:index INDEX'
3257
3258INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
3259multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3260
3261This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3262For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3263at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3264every 0.1 seconds.
3265
3266(defun show-anim (file max)
3267 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3268 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3269
3270(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3271 (when (= idx max)
3272 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3273 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3274 (save-excursion
3275 (set-buffer buffer)
3276 (goto-char (point-min))
3277 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3278 (insert-image img "x"))
3279 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3280
3281**** PNG, image type `png'
3282
3283Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3284package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3285properties defined.
3286
3287**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3288
3289Additional image properties supported are:
3290
3291`:pt-width WIDTH'
3292
3293WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3294integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3295
3296`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3297
3298HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3299must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
3300
3301`:bounding-box BOX'
3302
3303BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3304the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3305files. This is an required property.
3306
3307Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3308lisp/gs.el.
3309
3310*** Lisp interface.
3311
79214ddf
FP
3312The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3313which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
3314
3315Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3316they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3317The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
3318manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3319images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
3320
3321*** Simplified image API, image.el
3322
3323The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3324creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3325can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3326define an image based on available image types. The functions
3327`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3328buffer.
3329
3330+++
3331** Display margins.
3332
3333Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3334and images.
3335
3336To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3337`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3338`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3339obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3340`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3341the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3342of the display margins.
3343
3344You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3345containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3346one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3347string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3348in this file).
3349
3350+++
3351** Help display
3352
3353Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3354moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3355`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3356that have a `help-echo' property.
3357
9662da0b 3358If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3359is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3360the window in which the help was found.
3361
3362If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3363`help-echo' text property was found.
3364
3365If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3366POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3367
3368If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3369the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3370mouse.
d5aa31d8 3371
9662da0b
GM
3372If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3373string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3374
3375For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3376determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3377property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3378For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3379used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3380
3381The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3382the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3383causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3384
3385+++
3386** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3387
3388The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3389This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3390
3391The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3392scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3393The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3394scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3395used.
3396
79214ddf
FP
3397 (global-set-key [A-down]
3398 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3399 (interactive)
79214ddf 3400 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3401 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3402 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3403 #'(lambda ()
3404 (interactive)
79214ddf 3405 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3406 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3407
3408+++
3409** New hook `fontification-functions'.
3410
3411Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
3412when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
3413variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
3414is called with one argument, POS.
3415
3416At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
3417characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
3418as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
3419property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
3420`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
3421
3422+++
3423** Tool bar support.
3424
3425Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
3426parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
3427controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
3428suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
3429`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
3430automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
3431
3432*** Tool bar item definitions
3433
3434Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
3435`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
3436where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 3437
a933dad1
DL
3438CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
3439evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
3440the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
3441property (see below).
79214ddf 3442
a933dad1
DL
3443BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
3444binding are currently ignored.
3445
3446The following properties are recognized:
3447
3448`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 3449
a933dad1
DL
3450FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
3451or disabled.
79214ddf 3452
a933dad1 3453`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 3454
a933dad1 3455FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 3456
a933dad1
DL
3457`:filter FUNCTION'
3458
3459FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
3460FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
3461used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 3462
a933dad1
DL
3463`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
3464
3465TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
3466and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 3467
a933dad1
DL
3468`:image IMAGES'
3469
3470IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
3471image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
3472meaning of each of the four elements:
3473
3474 Index Use when item is
3475 ----------------------------------------
3476 0 enabled and selected
3477 1 enabled and deselected
3478 2 disabled and selected
3479 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 3480
4ba7246d
GM
3481If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
3482algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
3483
a933dad1 3484`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 3485
a933dad1
DL
3486Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
3487is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
3488
dab96841 3489The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
d1e68bce
DL
3490toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
3491to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
3492menu bar.
dab96841 3493
a933dad1
DL
3494*** Tool-bar-related variables.
3495
3496If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
3497resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
3498than 1/4 of the frame's size.
3499
79214ddf 3500If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
3501raised when the mouse moves over them.
3502
3503You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
3504`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
3505pixels. Default is 1.
3506
3507You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
3508`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
3509
3510*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
3511
3512You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 3513a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
3514
3515 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
3516 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
3517 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
3518
3519is the original tool bar item definition, then
3520
3521 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
3522
3523makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
3524item.
3525
3526** Mode line changes.
3527
3528+++
3529*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
3530
3531The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
3532that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
3533a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
3534
35351. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
3536a `local-map' text property.
3537
35382. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
3539that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
3540
35413. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
3542is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
3543`local-map' property.
3544
3545The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
3546properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
3547example.
3548
54522c9f
GM
3549*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
3550evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
3551
a933dad1
DL
3552+++
3553*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
3554variable mode-line-format to nil.
3555
3556+++
3557*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
3558
3559This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
3560`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
3561completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
3562`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
3563line.
3564
3565The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
3566`header-line'.
3567
3568The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
3569position in the header-line.
3570
3571+++
3572** Text property `display'
3573
623a0aae
GM
3574The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
3575replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
3576also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
3577the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
a933dad1
DL
3578below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
3579
623a0aae
GM
3580*** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
3581
3582To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
3583text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
3584
3585If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
3586marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
3587the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
3588is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3589simpler form STRING as property value.
3590
a933dad1
DL
3591*** Variable width and height spaces
3592
3593To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
3594specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
3595`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
3596area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
3597marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
3598displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3599simpler form STRETCH as property value.
3600
3601The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
3602PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
3603properties described below.
3604
3605The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
3606characters having the `display' property.
3607
3608- :width WIDTH
3609
3610Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
3611character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
3612
3613- :relative-width FACTOR
3614
3615Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
3616first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
3617same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
3618width of that character by FACTOR.
3619
3620- :align-to HPOS
3621
3622Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
3623value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
3624
3625Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
3626
3627- :height HEIGHT
3628
3629Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
3630normal line height.
3631
3632- :relative-height FACTOR
3633
3634The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
3635of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
3636
3637- :ascent ASCENT
3638
3639Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
3640used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
3641baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
3642equal to 100.
3643
3644You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
3645
3646*** Images
3647
3648A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
3649. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
3650in the display, the characters having this display specification in
3651their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
3652the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
3653`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
3654area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
3655the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
3656as display specification.
3657
3658*** Other display properties
3659
3660- :space-width FACTOR
3661
3662Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
3663should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
3664integer or float.
3665
3666- :height HEIGHT
3667
3668Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
3669
3670If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
3671means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
3672the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
3673``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
3674a font is available counts as a step.
3675
3676If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
3677as tall as the frame's default font.
3678
3679If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
3680height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
3681
3682Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
3683`height' bound to the current specified font height.
3684
3685- :raise FACTOR
3686
3687FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
3688font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
3689raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
3690amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
3691`:height' subproperty.
3692
3693*** Conditional display properties
3694
3695All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
3696has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
3697applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
3698During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
3699the text having the `display' property.
3700
3701The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
3702`(:when t SPEC)'.
3703
3704+++
3705** New menu separator types.
3706
3707Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
3708item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
3709treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
3710to specify other menu separator types.
3711
3712- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
3713
3714No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
3715separator occurs.
3716
3717- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
3718
3719A single line in the menu's foreground color.
3720
3721- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
3722
3723A double line in the menu's foreground color.
3724
3725- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
3726
3727A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3728
3729- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
3730
3731A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3732
3733- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
3734
3735A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
3736displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
3737
3738- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
3739
3740A single line with 3D raised appearance.
3741
3742- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
3743
3744A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
3745
3746- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
3747
3748A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
3749
3750- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
3751
3752Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3753
3754- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
3755
3756Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
3757
3758- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
3759
3760Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3761
3762- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
3763
3764Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
3765
3766Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
3767the corresponding single-line separators.
3768
3769+++
3770** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
3771
3772The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
3773`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
3774Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
3775that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
3776default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
3777default background is the background color of the frame, and the
3778default foreground is black.
3779
3780The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
3781(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
3782`ScrollBarBackground').
3783
3784Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
3785settings for scroll bar colors.
3786
3787+++
3788** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
3789display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
3790
3791---
3792** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
3793starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
3794on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
3795line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
3796the original window start.
3797
3798---
3799** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
3800`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
3801now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
3802
3803+++
3804** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
3805
3806A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
3807`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
3808windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
3809other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
3810
3811The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
3812fixed-width and fixed-height.
3813
3814 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
3815
3816A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
3817fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
3818window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
3819change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
3820temporarily to nil, for example
3821
3822 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
3823 (enlarge-window 10))
3824
79214ddf 3825Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 3826or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
3827
3828** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
3829terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
3830to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
3831overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
3832horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
3833support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 3834
3787e12e
GM
3835
3836^L
3837* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
3838
3839** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
3840input.
3841
3842** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
3843
3844** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
3845
3846** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
3847only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
3848exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
3849(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
3850(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
3851
3852** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
3853been added.
3854
3855^L
3856* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
3857
3858** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
3859
3860^L
3861* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
3862
3863** Not new, but not mentioned before:
3864M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
3865\f
3866* Changes in Emacs 20.4
3867
3868** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
3869
3870You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
3871Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
3872`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
3873
3874If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
3875is the one that is used.
3876
3877** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
3878the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
3879Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
3880separate from the command's regular output.
3881Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
3882says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
3883In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
3884the buffer name.
3885
3886When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
3887output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
3888it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
3889cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
3890
3891** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
3892the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
3893is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
3894created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
3895
3896** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
3897example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
3898match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
3899quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
3900
3901** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
3902now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
3903if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
3904they never ignore case.
3905
3906** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
3907under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
3908applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
3909of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
3910just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
3911convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
3912part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
3913
3914If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
3915the same format that was used in the file before.
3916
3917You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
3918`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
3919
3920** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
3921renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
3922This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
3923
3924** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
3925The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
3926buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
3927your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
3928is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
3929end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
3930Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
3931
3932The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
3933eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
3934control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
3935format. You can now customize these variables.
3936
3937** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
3938filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
3939filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
3940enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
3941
3942** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
3943in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
3944windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
3945
3946** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
3947dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
3948doesn't have any effect.
3949
3950** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
3951not one per buffer.
3952
3953** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
3954use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
3955 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
3956
3957** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
3958To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
3959`auto-show-mode' command.
3960
3961** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
3962avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
3963versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
3964choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
3965occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
3966
3967** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
3968cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
3969
3970** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
3971character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
3972feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
3973
3974** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
3975the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
3976interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
3977and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
3978
3979** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
3980
3981The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
3982that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
3983one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
3984codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
3985set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
3986
3987Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
3988from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
3989
3990IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
3991equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
3992a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
3993`?' on other systems.
3994
3995IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
3996feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
3997Unix.
3998
3999Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
4000current codepage when it starts.
4001
4002** Mail changes
4003
4004*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
4005`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
4006appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
4007non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
4008MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
4009headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
4010latin-1:
4011
4012 MIME-version: 1.0
4013 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
4014 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
4015
4016*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
4017default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
4018default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
4019sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
4020buffer-file-coding-system.
4021
4022You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
4023sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
4024mail.
4025
4026*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
4027if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
4028Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
4029list of possible coding systems.
4030
4031** CC Mode changes
4032
4033*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
4034modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
4035longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
4036docstring for details.
4037
4038*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
4039symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
4040found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
4041prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
4042lineup functions use this feature currently.
4043
4044*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
4045"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
4046
4047*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
4048"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
4049
4050*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
4051from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
4052symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
4053c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
4054anonymous classes.
4055
4056*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
4057syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
4058
4059*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
4060inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
4061support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
4062function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
4063
4064*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
4065(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
4066brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
4067c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
4068(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
4069
4070*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
4071
4072*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
4073
4074*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
4075for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
4076
4077*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
4078
4079*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
4080associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
4081This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
4082circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
4083class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
4084
4085** Gnus changes.
4086
4087*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
4088added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
4089Gnus manual for the full story.
4090
4091*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
4092before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
4093group, which is created automatically.
4094
4095*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
4096values.
4097
4098*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
4099
4100*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
4101outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
4102
4103*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
4104`C-u C-c C-c'.
4105
4106*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
4107
4108*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
4109re-highlighting of the article buffer.
4110
4111*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
4112
4113*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
4114Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
4115
4116*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
4117`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
4118
4119*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
4120control over simplification.
4121
4122*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
4123
4124*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
4125limit.
4126
4127*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
4128
4129*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
4130
4131*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
4132If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
4133rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
4134
4135*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
4136`a' forces normal posting method.
4137
4138*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
4139-- `W d'.
4140
4141*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
4142to a non-nil value.
4143
4144*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
4145where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
4146
4147*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
4148has been added.
4149
4150*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
4151
4152*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
4153
4154*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
4155`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
4156
4157*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
4158`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
4159
4160*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
4161
4162*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
4163been added.
4164
4165*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
4166`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
4167
4168*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
4169updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
4170
4171*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
4172
4173*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
4174
4175*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
4176
4177** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
4178
4179*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
4180options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
4181nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
4182
4183*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
4184TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
4185of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
4186TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
4187can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
4188
4189*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
4190All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
4191but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
4192the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
4193
4194*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
4195the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
4196buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
4197mismatch.
4198
4199** Changes to RefTeX mode
4200
4201*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
4202file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
4203
4204*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
4205lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
4206characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
4207removed from the label.
4208
4209*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
4210a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
4211
4212*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
4213customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
4214
4215*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
4216`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
4217expressions.
4218
4219*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
4220
4221** New/deleted modes and packages
4222
4223*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
4224SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
4225
4226*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
4227editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
4228SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
4229
4230*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
4231changes with a special face.
4232
4233*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
4234this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
4235Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
4236\f
4237* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
4238
4239** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
4240This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
4241conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
4242and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
4243check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
4244
4245The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
4246Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
4247distribution when the config.bat script is run.
4248
4249** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
4250MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
4251controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
4252directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
4253Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
4254on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
4255string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
4256program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
4257printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
4258
4259** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
4260output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
4261available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
4262input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
4263temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4264program.
4265
4266An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4267and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4268programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4269automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4270as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4271ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4272
4273** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4274a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4275MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4276was not documented clearly before.
4277
4278** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4279This includes Tetris and Snake.
4280\f
4281* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4282
4283** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4284return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4285They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4286meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4287
4288** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4289WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4290and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4291
4292** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4293
4294*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4295It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4296
4297*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4298the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4299integers.
4300
4301** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4302files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4303arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4304file names and attributes are returned.
4305
4306** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4307sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4308accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4309It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4310returns the result.
4311
4312** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4313to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4314
4315** New functions for base64 conversion:
4316
4317The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4318into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4319performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4320optionally.
4321
4322Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4323job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4324
4325**
4326The new function process-running-child-p
4327will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4328terminal to its own child process.
4329
4330** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4331when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4332to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4333itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4334
4335** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4336be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4337
4338** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4339:included is an alias for :visible.
4340
4341easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4342easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4343to move or copy menu entries.
4344
4345** Multibyte editing changes
4346
4347*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4348an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4349make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4350work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4351char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4352 (setq char (sref str idx)
4353 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4354The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4355
4356If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4357(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4358 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4359
4360*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4361region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4362deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4363
4364 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4365
4366This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4367across the boundary.
4368
4369*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4370`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4371 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4372 contains 8-bit characters.
4373 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4374 contains invalid characters.
4375
4376*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4377text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4378preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4379text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4380way.
4381
4382*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4383If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4384end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4385prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4386
4387*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4388compose Thai characters in a string.
4389
4390** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4391argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4392for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4393menus should always use the third argument.
4394
4395** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4396read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4397arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4398input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4399
4400** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4401of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4402programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4403inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4404
4405** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
4406the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
4407returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
4408echo area contents.
4409
4410 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
4411
4412** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
4413NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
4414requested feature cannot be loaded.
4415
4416** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
4417foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
4418means to clear out that attribute.
4419
4420** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
4421gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
4422
4423** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
4424read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
4425unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
4426end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
4427
4428** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
4429the gap of the current buffer.
4430
4431** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
4432to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
4433current buffer.
4434
4435** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
4436facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
4437These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
4438it back in after any modifications have been made.
4439\f
4440* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
4441
4442** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
4443the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
4444/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
4445directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
4446subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
4447
4448Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
4449names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
4450Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
4451which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
4452these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
4453
4454Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
4455starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
4456time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
4457
4458This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
4459Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
4460to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
4461subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
4462`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
4463results.
4464
4465** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
4466GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
4467that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
4468fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
4469\f
4470* Changes in Emacs 20.3
4471
4472** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
4473including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
4474it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
4475perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
4476
4477** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
4478specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
4479region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
4480further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
4481command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
4482within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
4483are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
4484region.
4485
4486In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
4487selective undo.
4488
4489** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
4490unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
4491buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
4492effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
4493Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
4494
4495The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
4496though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
4497-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
4498load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
4499
4500** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
4501no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
4502enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
4503something that most users not do.
4504
4505** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
4506operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
4507The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
4508applications.
4509
4510C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
4511pasting operations.
4512
4513** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
4514setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
4515like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
4516printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
4517`ps-printer-name'.
4518
4519** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
4520minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
4521any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
4522except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
4523incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
4524hits a new word.
4525
4526Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
4527Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
4528to be confused by TeX commands.
4529
4530You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
4531correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
4532clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
4533of various alternative replacements and actions.
4534
4535Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
4536the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
4537corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
4538alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
4539flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
4540
4541Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
4542flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
4543
4544** Changes in input method usage.
4545
4546Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
4547the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
4548respectively.
4549
4550You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
4551
4552If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
4553of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
4554
4555The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
4556that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
4557
4558 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
4559
4560 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
4561
4562 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
4563 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
4564
4565 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
4566 given in the following case:
4567 o When you are using a complex input method.
4568 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
4569
4570If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
4571input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
4572and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
4573setting it to t is helpful.
4574
4575The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
4576
4577In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
4578keys:
4579 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
4580 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
4581 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
4582These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
4583environment.
4584
4585** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
4586names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
4587minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
4588get
4589
4590 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
4591
4592which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
4593
4594Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
4595Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
4596
4597** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
4598at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
4599its owner and group.
4600
4601** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
4602Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
4603
4604** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
4605contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
4606
4607** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
4608which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
4609in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
4610by the left edge of the rectangle.
4611
4612** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
4613increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
4614C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
4615for writing keyboard macros.
4616
4617** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
4618files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
4619frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
4620the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
4621additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
4622info.
4623
4624** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
4625
4626** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
4627query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
4628contents only.
4629
4630** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
4631confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
4632the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
4633says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
4634
4635** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
4636non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
4637literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
4638
4639** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
4640now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
4641Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
4642inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
4643
4644** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
4645failure if the command produces no output.
4646
4647** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
4648manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
4649the mouse.
4650
4651** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
4652mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
4653function and variable names.
4654
4655** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
4656reading specific files. This has higher priority than
4657file-coding-system-alist.
4658
4659** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
4660t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
4661converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
4662the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
4663according to the current fontset.
4664
4665** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
4666
4667The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
4668that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
4669nonascii-insert-offset.
4670
4671For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
4672enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
4673nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
4674characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
4675
4676** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
4677an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
4678
4679** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
4680letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
4681
4682** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
4683are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
4684command keys.
4685
4686** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
4687user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
4688
4689Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
4690user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
4691all variables that have documentation.
4692
4693** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
4694shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
4695that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
4696minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
4697it should show; the default is 20.
4698
4699Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
4700the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
4701of your input.
4702
4703** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
4704all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
4705recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
4706argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
4707the customizable options which were changed since that version.
4708Newly added options are included as well.
4709
4710If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
4711then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
4712for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
4713
4714This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
4715Customize menu.
4716
4717** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
4718the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
4719
4720** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
4721buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
4722invoked.
4723
4724** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
4725that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
4726The default is 1.
4727
4728** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
4729syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
4730new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
4731(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
4732sensibly.
4733
4734** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
4735
4736** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
4737value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
4738two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
4739
4740** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
4741reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
4742for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
4743every night.
4744
4745** Desktop changes
4746
4747*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
4748the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
4749
4750*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
4751and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
4752
4753** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
4754read and post multi-lingual articles.
4755
4756** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
4757doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
4758be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
4759outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
4760the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
4761made invisible again.
4762
4763** Mail reading and sending changes
4764
4765*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
4766the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
4767changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
4768toggle.
4769
4770*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
4771now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
4772summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
4773the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
4774rmail-default-body-file.
4775
4776*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
4777longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
4778handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
4779
4780*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
4781it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
4782is evaluated to insert the signature.
4783
4784*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
4785outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
4786handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
4787putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
4788transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
4789especially interested in trying feedmail.
4790
4791feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
4792feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
4793provided by feedmail are:
4794
4795**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
4796stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
4797there is also a queue for draft messages
4798
4799**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
4800be prompted for confirmation
4801
4802**** does smart filling of address headers
4803
4804**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
4805the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
4806can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
4807
4808**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
4809the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
4810/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
4811function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
4812
4813** Dired changes
4814
4815*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
4816files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
4817
4818*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
4819run Dired on the directory name at point.
4820
4821*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
4822files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
4823for a specified regexp.
4824
4825** VC Changes
4826
4827*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
4828conveniently.
4829
4830*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
4831faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
4832Dired.
4833
4834VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
4835directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
4836listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
4837currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
4838
4839You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
4840then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
4841vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
4842control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
4843on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
4844
4845All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
4846is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
4847`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
4848the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
4849`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
4850
4851The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
4852toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
4853VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
4854`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
4855
4856Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
4857ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
4858command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
4859
4860*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
4861file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
4862session to resolve them.
4863
4864Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
4865resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
4866contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
4867uses as well).
4868
4869*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
4870command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
4871you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
4872either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
4873branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
4874If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
4875using ediff.
4876
4877** Changes in Font Lock
4878
4879*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
4880are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
4881use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
4882unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
4883compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
4884
4885** Frame name display changes
4886
4887*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
4888frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
4889raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
4890when many frames are invisible or iconified.
4891
4892*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
4893frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
4894menu.
4895
4896** Comint (subshell) changes
4897
4898*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
4899subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
4900with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
4901
4902*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
4903
4904C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
4905that is, the line after the last line you got.
4906You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
4907
4908C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
4909send the current line together with the following line, when you send
4910the following line.
4911
4912C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
4913which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
4914previously sent input.
4915
4916C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
4917it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
4918as the search string.
4919
4920*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
4921automatically in compilation-mode windows.
4922
4923** C mode changes
4924
4925*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
4926and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
4927assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
4928definition.
4929
4930*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
4931(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
4932Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
4933style is still the default however.
4934
4935*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
4936
4937*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
4938are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
4939them. They do not have key bindings by default.
4940
4941*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
4942and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
4943
4944*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
4945namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
4946
4947*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
4948makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
4949
4950*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
4951c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
4952
4953*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
4954should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
4955package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
4956variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
4957
4958** Changes to hippie-expand.
4959
4960*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
4961non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
4962which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
4963
4964*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
4965non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
4966expanding dynamically.
4967
4968*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
4969non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
4970
4971*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
4972non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
4973this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
4974expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
4975
4976*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
4977
4978** Changes in BibTeX mode.
4979
4980*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
4981bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
4982automatic key generation. This replaces variable
4983bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
4984against the first word in the title.
4985
4986*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
4987capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
4988bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
4989lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
4990lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
4991bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
4992
4993*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
4994generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
4995replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
4996bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
4997
4998** Changes in vcursor.el.
4999
5000*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
5001and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
5002variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
5003entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
5004`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
5005in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
5006
5007*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
5008Editing group once the package is loaded.
5009
5010*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
5011generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
5012vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
5013
5014*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
5015vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
5016
5017** Ispell changes.
5018
5019*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
5020buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
5021are identified by syntax tables in effect.
5022
5023*** Generic region skipping implemented.
5024A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
5025and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
5026defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
5027include:
5028
5029 o URLs are automatically skipped
5030 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
5031
5032*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
5033
5034** Changes to RefTeX mode
5035
5036RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
5037large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
5038re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
5039section `Optimizations' in the manual.
5040
5041*** New recursive parser.
5042
5043The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
5044entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
5045recursive parser scans the individual files.
5046
5047*** Parsing only part of a document.
5048
5049Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
5050partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
5051the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
5052
5053 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
5054
5055*** Storing parsing information in a file.
5056
5057This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
5058
5059 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
5060
5061*** Using multiple selection buffers
5062
5063If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
5064for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
5065
5066 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
5067
5068*** References to external documents.
5069
5070The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
5071documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
5072documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
5073macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
5074RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
5075the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
5076The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
5077
5078*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
5079
5080The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
5081and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
5082
5083Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
5084the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
5085
5086*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
5087
5088The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
5089buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
5090
5091*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
5092
5093The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
5094contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
5095`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
5096have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
5097enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
5098at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
5099more.
5100
5101*** Support for the varioref package
5102
5103The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
5104
5105*** New hooks
5106
5107Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
5108and citations are created. These hooks are
5109`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
5110`reftex-format-cite-function'.
5111
5112*** Citations outside LaTeX
5113
5114The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
5115a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
5116
5117*** Short context is no longer fontified.
5118
5119The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
5120fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
5121fontified, use
5122
5123 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
5124
5125** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
5126With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
5127the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
5128directories that contain the same file name.
5129
5130Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
5131Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
5132file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
5133Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
5134have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
5135names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
5136directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
5137directory.
5138
5139** New modes and packages
5140
5141*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
5142It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
5143it, but some do not.
5144
5145*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
5146code.
5147
5148*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
5149current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
5150around in a buffer.
5151
5152Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
5153
5154*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
5155uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
5156be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
5157established system of notation similar to Chess.
5158
5159*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
5160documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
5161guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
5162
5163*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
5164available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
5165system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
5166simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
5167functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
5168the like.
5169
5170*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
5171identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
5172
5173*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
5174within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
5175used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
5176the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
5177
5178*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
5179
5180 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
5181 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
5182 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
5183 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
5184 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
5185 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
5186 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
5187 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
5188 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
5189 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
5190 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
5191
5192 Platform-specific modes:
5193
5194 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
5195 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
5196 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
5197 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
5198 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
5199 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
5200 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
5201 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
5202 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
5203\f
5204* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5205
5206** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
5207use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
5208That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
5209Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
5210
5211Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
5212you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
5213consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
5214
5215** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
5216and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
5217specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
5218searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
5219
5220** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
5221multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
5222character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
5223environment.
5224
5225** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
5226take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
5227string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
5228current input method for reading this one event.
5229
5230** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
5231now control whether to output certain characters as
5232backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
5233non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
5234characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
5235in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
5236\f
5237* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5238
5239** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
5240of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
5241
5242** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
5243in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
5244always increases point by 1.
5245
5246The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
5247considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
5248
5249See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
5250
5251** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
5252Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
5253default value changed. For example,
5254
5255 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
5256 :type 'integer
5257 :group 'foo
5258 :version "20.3")
5259
5260 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
5261 :version "20.3")
5262
5263If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5264default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5265is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5266`:version' in the top level group.
5267
5268This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5269
5270** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5271starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5272
5273However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5274symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5275support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5276to themselves.
5277
5278If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5279this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5280values whatever.
5281
5282** There is a new debugger command, R.
5283It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5284in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5285
5286** Frame-local variables.
5287
5288You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5289the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5290local bindings for that variable.
5291
5292These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5293frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5294modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5295parameter name.
5296
5297Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5298Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5299active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5300that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5301
5302It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5303clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5304very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5305through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5306
5307** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5308"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5309evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5310makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5311See the documentation in sregex.el.
5312
5313** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5314is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5315parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5316The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5317
5318** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5319If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5320
5321** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5322known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5323define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5324
5325** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5326when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5327it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5328history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5329
5330The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5331return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5332empty input.
5333
5334** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5335for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5336`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5337Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5338`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5339
5340** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5341echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5342a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5343default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5344
5345** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5346specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5347function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5348place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5349non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5350
5351** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5352If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5353up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5354end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5355
5356** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5357which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5358If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5359
5360** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5361holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5362was directed to display this buffer.
5363
5364** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5365with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5366describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5367other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5368set-window-configuration.
5369
5370** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5371window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5372positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5373windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5374
5375** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5376override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5377look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5378
5379If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5380non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5381map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5382
5383minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5384and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5385
5386** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5387except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5388
5389** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5390USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5391floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5392
5393** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5394to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5395in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5396it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5397
5398** Menu changes
5399
5400*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5401keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5402better supported.
5403
5404The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
5405a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
5406you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
5407can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
5408then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
5409
5410*** A new format for menu items is supported.
5411
5412In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
5413 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
5414defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
5415starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
5416
5417The format is:
5418 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
5419 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
5420where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
5421string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
5422The supported properties include
5423
5424:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5425 item is enabled.
5426:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5427 item should appear in the menu.
5428:filter FILTER-FN
5429 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
5430 which will be REAL-BINDING.
5431 It should return a binding to use instead.
5432:keys DESCRIPTION
5433 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
5434 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
5435 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
5436:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
5437 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
5438 keyboard binding.
5439:key-sequence nil
5440 This means that the command normally has no
5441 keyboard equivalent.
5442:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
5443:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
5444 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
5445 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
5446 value says whether this button is currently selected.
5447
5448Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
5449Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
5450
5451(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
5452
5453** New event types
5454
5455*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
5456mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
5457corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
5458which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
5459
5460 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
5461
5462where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5463same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
5464indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
5465negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
5466the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
5467forward, away from the user.
5468
5469As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5470
5471*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
5472files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
5473and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
5474filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
5475loaded into Emacs. The format is:
5476
5477 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
5478
5479where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5480same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
5481that were dragged and dropped.
5482
5483As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5484
5485** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
5486
5487*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
5488any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
5489to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
5490
5491*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
5492can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
5493that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
5494
5495*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
5496in Emacs 19 and before.
5497
5498The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
5499The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
5500
5501*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
5502buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
5503unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
5504representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
5505
5506This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
5507as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
5508viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
5509one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
5510will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
5511
5512This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
5513representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
5514(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
5515consistent with the new representation.
5516
5517*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
5518representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
5519about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
5520however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5521
5522The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
5523nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
5524using the table nonascii-translation-table.
5525
5526*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
5527representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
5528representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5529
5530The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
5531loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
5532is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
5533
5534*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5535which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
5536
5537*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5538which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
5539
5540*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
5541portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
5542so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
5543You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
5544
5545*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
5546it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
5547
5548*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
5549convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
5550buffer or string being searched.
5551
5552One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
5553[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
5554searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
5555searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
5556obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
5557you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
5558expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
5559
5560*** Structure of coding system changed.
5561
5562All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
5563by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
5564which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
5565as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
5566vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
5567your own alias name of a coding system by the function
5568define-coding-system-alias.
5569
5570The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
5571the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
5572access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
5573pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
5574character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
5575safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
5576'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
5577`iso-8859-1'.
5578
5579Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
5580The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
5581coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
5582(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
5583
5584Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
5585also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
5586are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
5587the other character sets and read it back correctly.
5588
5589*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
5590proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
5591This function requires a user interaction.
5592
5593*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
5594find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
5595select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
5596systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
5597a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
5598select-safe-coding-system.
5599
5600*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
5601decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
5602last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
5603was done.
5604
5605*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
5606used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
5607coding systems used by some specific language environment.
5608
5609*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
5610return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
5611characters are found, they now return a list of single element
5612`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
5613
5614*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
5615coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
5616coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
5617converted.
5618
5619*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
5620coding system for communicating with other X clients.
5621
5622*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
5623character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
5624character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
5625each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
5626either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
5627range of characters.
5628
5629*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
5630Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
5631
5632*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
5633in the current buffer at position POS.
5634
5635*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
5636input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
5637function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
5638character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
5639event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
5640binding input-method-function to nil.
5641
5642The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
5643method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
5644input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
5645the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
5646not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
5647
5648The input method function is not called when reading the second and
5649subsequent events of a key sequence.
5650
5651*** You can customize any language environment by using
5652set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
5653
5654The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
5655customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
5656instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
5657environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
5658exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
5659\f
5660* Changes in Emacs 20.1
5661
5662** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
5663options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
5664at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
5665tree structure.
5666
5667M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
5668user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
5669
5670With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
5671session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
5672in your .emacs file.)
5673
5674** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
5675You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
5676
5677** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
5678This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
5679
5680** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
5681immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
5682kills the region.
5683
5684The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
5685delete the character before point, as usual.
5686
5687** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
5688on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
5689by setting search-highlight to nil.)
5690
5691** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
5692insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
5693the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
5694onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
5695history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
5696past.)
5697
5698** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
5699This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
5700in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
5701TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
5702makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
5703
5704As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
5705and is an alias for it.
5706
5707If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
5708use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
5709
5710** Scrolling changes
5711
5712*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
5713position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
5714
5715In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
5716on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
5717where it started.
5718
5719*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
5720move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
5721screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
5722does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
5723
5724*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
5725top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
5726comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
5727recenters the window.
5728
5729** International character set support (MULE)
5730
5731Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
5732including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
5733Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
5734Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
5735features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
5736MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
5737
5738Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
5739coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
5740character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
5741variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
5742into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
5743
5744Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
5745generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
5746supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
5747language, to make it possible to type them.
5748
5749The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
5750character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
5751
5752The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
5753to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
5754
5755You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
5756
5757 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
5758
5759Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
5760characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
5761argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
5762already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
5763characters for their work until they want to change.
5764
5765*** Input methods
5766
5767An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
5768specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
5769has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
5770the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
5771support several input methods.
5772
5773The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
5774another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
5775work.
5776
5777A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
5778characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
5779composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
5780consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
5781sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
5782letter.
5783
5784The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
5785by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
5786First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
5787marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
5788mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
5789
5790None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
5791they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
5792phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
5793converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
5794
5795Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
5796word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
5797typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
5798the first guess is wrong.
5799
5800*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
5801turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
5802
5803If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
5804byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
5805they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
5806the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
5807
5808However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
5809use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
5810includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
5811translate automatically to and from either one.
5812
5813*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
5814
5815Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
5816file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
5817sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
5818what you want.
5819
5820If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
5821example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
5822system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
5823multibyte characters in that buffer.
5824
5825If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
5826character conversion as well.
5827
5828*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
5829
5830A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
5831Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
5832requires using many fonts.
5833
5834Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
5835collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
5836
5837A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
5838the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
5839have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
5840you would use a font.
5841
5842If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
5843specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
5844display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
5845
5846The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
5847(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
5848characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
5849or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
5850and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
5851
5852*** Defining fontsets.
5853
5854Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
5855chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
5856with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
5857
5858Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
5859of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
5860`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
5861standard fontset are created automatically.
5862
5863If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
5864argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
5865FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
5866with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
5867name is `fontset-startup'.
5868
5869Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
5870The resource value should have this form:
5871 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
5872FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
5873 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
5874 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
5875 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
5876The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
5877of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
5878CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
5879FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
5880
5881Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
5882last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
5883You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
5884
5885For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
5886font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
5887following resource,
5888 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
5889the font for ASCII is generated as below:
5890 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
5891Here is the substitution rule:
5892 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
5893 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
5894 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
5895 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
5896 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
5897
5898The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
5899fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
5900that function explicitly to create a fontset.
5901
5902With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
5903like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
5904name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
5905fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
5906fontsets.
5907
5908*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
5909defaults for a particular choice of language.
5910
5911Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
5912method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
5913visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
5914already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
5915language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
5916system for new files that you create.
5917
5918It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
5919set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
5920whole Emacs session.
5921
5922For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
5923chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
5924with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
5925
5926*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
5927specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
5928specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
5929the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
5930coding systems that Emacs supports.
5931
5932*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
5933lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
5934This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
5935After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
5936is used for *the immediately following command*.
5937
5938So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
5939write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
5940
5941If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
5942then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
5943
5944For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
5945visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
5946
5947*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
5948construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
5949to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
5950specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
5951of the file.
5952
5953*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
5954the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
5955code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
5956translated into that character code.
5957
5958This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
5959various countries to support the languages of those countries.
5960
5961By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
5962
5963*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
5964the coding system for keyboard input.
5965
5966Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
5967with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
5968some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
5969
5970By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
5971
5972Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
5973input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
5974translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
5975to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
5976designed to work with terminals.
5977
5978*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
5979specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
5980This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
5981has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
5982translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
5983in the corresponding buffer.
5984
5985By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
5986
5987*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
5988to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
5989It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
5990
5991*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
5992an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
5993command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
5994want to use.
5995
5996C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
5997method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
5998
5999*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
6000layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
6001remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
6002which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
6003
6004*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
6005the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
6006related information.
6007
6008*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
6009HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
6010scripts.
6011
6012*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
6013information about the support for a particular language.
6014You specify the language as an argument.
6015
6016*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
6017the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
6018first dash.
6019
6020A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
6021(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
6022whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
60231 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
6024
6025 A alternativnyj (Russian)
6026 B big5 (Chinese)
6027 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
6028 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
6029 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
6030 E euc-japan (Japanese)
6031 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6032 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
6033 K euc-korea (Korean)
6034 R koi8 (Russian)
6035 Q tibetan
6036 S shift_jis (Japanese)
6037 T lao
6038 T tis620 (Thai)
6039 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
6040 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6041 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
6042 v viqr (Vietnamese)
6043 z hz (Chinese)
6044
6045When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
6046two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
6047coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
6048keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
6049
6050*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
6051conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
6052
6053When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
6054into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
6055rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
6056Rmail files themselves.
6057
6058*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
6059conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
6060
6061Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
6062for sending mail:
6063
6064- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
6065- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
6066- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
6067 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
6068- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
6069
6070*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
6071to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
6072Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
6073translations.
6074
6075** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
6076of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
6077insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
6078without any conversion.
6079
6080** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
6081You can now specify any number of octal digits.
6082RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
6083any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
6084
6085** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
6086functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
6087
6088Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
6089Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
6090
6091Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
6092mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
6093
6094** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
6095complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
6096in the buffer before point.
6097
6098With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
6099symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
6100you are using.
6101
6102With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
6103just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
6104
6105** File locking works with NFS now.
6106
6107The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
6108in the same directory as FILENAME.
6109
6110This means that collision detection between two different machines now
6111works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
6112can become a bottleneck.
6113
6114The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
6115does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
6116create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
6117file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
6118rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
6119so useful that the change is worth while.
6120
6121When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
6122are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
6123collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
6124tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
6125
6126** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
6127it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
6128show-paren-mode.
6129
6130** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
6131selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
6132delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
6133
6134** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
6135within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
6136complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
6137
6138** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
6139it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
6140set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
6141
6142** Changes in View mode.
6143
6144*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
6145Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
6146
6147*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
6148view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
6149
6150*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
6151previous state.
6152
6153*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
6154scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
6155
6156*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
6157non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
6158not just the selected window.
6159
6160*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
6161read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
6162turns View mode on or off.
6163
6164*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
6165how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
6166delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
6167
6168** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
6169now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
6170
6171** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
6172has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
6173presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
6174which version to compare with.
6175
6176** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
6177blocks if a match is inside the block.
6178
6179The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
6180is outside the block. By customizing the variable
6181isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
6182shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
6183
6184By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
6185of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
6186blocks, all of them or none.
6187
6188** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
6189current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
6190confirmation first.
6191
6192** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
6193now changes the major mode according to that file name.
6194However, the mode will not be changed if
6195(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
6196(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
6197 not suitable for ordinary files, or
6198(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
6199
6200This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
6201
6202However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
6203these commands do not change the major mode.
6204
6205** M-x occur changes.
6206
6207*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
6208it performs a case-sensitive search.
6209
6210*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
6211if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
6212using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
6213
6214** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
6215in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
6216window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
6217that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
6218buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
6219
6220** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
6221after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
6222appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
6223come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
6224
6225** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6226selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
6227buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
6228
6229** Outline mode changes.
6230
6231*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
6232
6233*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
6234
6235** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
6236you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
6237Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
6238was already active.
6239
6240The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
6241unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
6242get confused by it.
6243
6244If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
6245set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
6246
6247** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
6248
6249*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
6250conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
6251character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
6252including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
6253
6254The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
6255mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
6256copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
6257
6258*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
6259are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
6260values.
6261
6262`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
6263case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6264`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6265case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6266
6267** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6268certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6269can be. The default value is 30.
6270
6271** Changes in Mail mode.
6272
6273*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6274Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6275composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6276`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6277`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6278behavior.
6279
6280C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6281compose-mail-other-frame.
6282
6283*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6284the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6285replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6286buffer that shows the original message.
6287
6288*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6289with separator lines around the contents.
6290
6291*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6292in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6293definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6294need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6295
6296*** New features in the mail-complete command.
6297
6298**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6299for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6300controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6301Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6302
6303**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6304to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6305/etc/passwd.
6306
6307**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6308to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6309/etc/passwd.
6310
6311** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6312special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6313directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6314reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6315
6316Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6317when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6318be taken to be magic.
6319
6320** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6321files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6322available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6323
6324M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6325(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6326
6327** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6328suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6329
6330In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6331
6332new key dired.el binding old key
6333------- ---------------- -------
6334 * c dired-change-marks c
6335 * m dired-mark m
6336 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6337 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6338 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6339 * u dired-unmark u
6340 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6341 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6342 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6343 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6344 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6345 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6346
6347** Rmail changes.
6348
6349*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6350saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6351chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6352each time you run it.
6353
6354*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6355whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6356
6357*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6358messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6359means to move in the opposite direction.
6360
6361*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6362you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6363
6364*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6365just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6366It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6367can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6368for output.
6369
6370** Gnus changes.
6371
6372*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6373
6374*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6375Gnus.
6376
6377*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6378`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6379
6380*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6381article mode line.
6382
6383*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6384
6385*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6386
6387(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6388
6389*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6390are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6391`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6392
6393*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6394
6395*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6396
6397*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6398See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6399
6400*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6401Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6402used to pick articles.
6403
6404*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
6405another have been added.
6406
6407 `M-x gnus-change-server'
6408
6409*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
6410generating lines in buffers.
6411
6412*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
6413`M-C-_'.
6414
6415*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
6416
6417*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
6418
6419 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
6420
6421*** Scores can be decayed.
6422
6423 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
6424
6425*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
6426Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
6427
6428*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
6429the native server.
6430
6431 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
6432
6433*** A new command for reading collections of documents
6434(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
6435
6436*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
6437
6438*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
6439even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
6440
6441*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
6442(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
6443
6444 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
6445 a group.
6446
6447*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
6448sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
6449
6450 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
6451
6452*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
6453
6454 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
6455
6456*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
6457
6458 Use the `Y c' command.
6459
6460*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
6461
6462*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
6463
6464 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
6465
6466*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
6467from incoming mail before saving the mail.
6468
6469 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
6470
6471*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
6472
6473*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
6474the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
6475
6476 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
6477
6478Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
6479and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
6480from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
6481hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
6482this issue.)
6483
6484Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
6485automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
6486particular news group. This can be done by:
6487
6488 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
6489
6490Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
6491of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
6492"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
6493system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
6494for reading and posting).
6495
6496CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
6497 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
6498Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
6499newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
6500there.
6501
6502Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
6503default. Here are some of these default settings:
6504
6505 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
6506 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
6507 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
6508 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
6509 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
6510
6511When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
6512the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
6513
6514** CC mode changes.
6515
6516*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
6517code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
6518values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
6519this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
6520Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
6521loaded.
6522
6523If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
6524Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
6525style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
6526share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
6527c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
6528must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
6529
6530*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
6531of the current buffer.
6532
6533*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
6534it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
6535of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
6536
6537*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
6538style that the Python developers like.
6539
6540*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
6541This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
6542just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
6543
6544** VC Changes [new]
6545
6546** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
6547name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
6548directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
6549
6550This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
6551master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
6552developers.
6553
6554You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
6555RET in a buffer visiting that file.
6556
6557*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
6558other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
6559writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
6560calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
6561
6562*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
6563version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
6564
6565** Calendar changes.
6566
6567A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
6568of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
6569for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
6570
6571** ps-print changes
6572
6573There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
6574
6575*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
6576
6577The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
6578formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
6579`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
6580`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
6581It defaults to `letter'.
6582If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
6583
6584The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
6585of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
6586non-nil means "landscape" mode.
6587
6588The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
6589It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
6590It defaults to 1.
6591
6592*** Horizontal layout
6593
6594The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
6595`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
6596All are measured in points.
6597
6598*** Vertical layout
6599
6600The vertical layout is determined by the variables
6601`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
6602All are measured in points.
6603
6604*** Headers
6605
6606If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
6607`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
6608margin above the text.
6609
6610If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
6611framing box is printed around the header.
6612
6613The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
6614`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
6615
6616The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
6617`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
6618`ps-header-font-size'.
6619
6620*** Font managing
6621
6622The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
6623used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
6624`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
6625elements to this alist.
6626
6627The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
6628for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
6629
6630** hideshow changes.
6631
6632*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
6633C++, ; for lisp).
6634
6635*** Support for java-mode added.
6636
6637*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
6638in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
6639
6640*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
6641the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
6642way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
6643
6644*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
6645robust and a lot faster.
6646
6647*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
6648
6649*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
6650to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
6651documentation for more details.
6652
6653** Changes in Enriched mode.
6654
6655*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
6656filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
6657of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
6658use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
6659the next time unless the fill-column is different.
6660
6661*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
6662distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
6663as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
6664as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
6665
6666** Font Lock mode
6667
6668*** Custom support
6669
6670The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
6671font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
6672faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
6673group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
6674your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
6675consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
6676
6677You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
6678
6679*** Maximum decoration
6680
6681Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
6682default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
6683of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
6684supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
6685to get the old behavior.
6686
6687*** New support
6688
6689Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
6690
6691Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
6692support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
6693
6694*** Configurable support
6695
6696Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
6697additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
6698c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
6699java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
6700list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
6701of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
6702convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
6703
6704Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
6705way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
6706it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
6707
6708*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
6709
6710You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
6711highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
6712for any mode.
6713
6714For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
6715
6716 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
6717
6718in your ~/.emacs.
6719
6720*** New faces
6721
6722Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
6723font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
6724distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
6725to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
6726
6727*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
6728
6729The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
6730cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
6731same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
6732
6733*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
6734
6735The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
6736according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
6737the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
6738non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
6739refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
6740the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
6741Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
6742
6743This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
6744For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
6745this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
6746refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
6747containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
6748the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
6749
6750As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
6751
6752Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
6753Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
6754Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
6755new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
6756
6757If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
6758settings.
6759
6760** Ada mode changes.
6761
6762*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
6763If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
6764procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
6765you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
6766stubs.
6767
6768*** There are two new commands:
6769 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
6770 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
6771
6772The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
6773`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
6774`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
6775
6776*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
6777is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
6778Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
6779
6780*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
6781formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
6782places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
6783space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
6784
6785** Scheme mode changes.
6786
6787*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
6788mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
6789for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
6790with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
6791have any effect.
6792
6793If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
6794still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
6795scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
6796variables as buffer-local variables.
6797
6798*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
6799Use M-x dsssl-mode.
6800
6801** Changes to the emacsclient program
6802
6803*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
6804USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
6805associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
6806can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
6807
6808*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
6809it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
6810buffer in Emacs.
6811
6812*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
6813use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
6814ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
6815option takes precedence.
6816
6817** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
6818constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
6819(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
6820
6821** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
6822which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
6823the current defun.
6824
6825** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
6826following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
6827
6828** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
6829and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
6830necessary).
6831
6832** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
6833if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
6834these register values no longer become completely useless.
6835If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
6836asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
6837it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
6838
6839** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
6840example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
6841be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
6842you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
6843
6844You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
6845variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
6846file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
6847revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
6848only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
6849
6850** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
6851since it applies only to the current frame.
6852
6853** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
6854file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
6855and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
6856
6857This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
6858multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
6859variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
6860tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
6861instead of just the file you are editing.
6862
6863** RefTeX mode
6864
6865RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
6866and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
6867different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
6868multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
6869turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
6870
6871C-c ( reftex-label
6872 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
6873 knows which kind of label is needed.
6874
6875C-c ) reftex-reference
6876 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
6877 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
6878
6879C-c [ reftex-citation
6880 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
6881 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
6882
6883C-c & reftex-view-crossref
6884 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
6885
6886C-c = reftex-toc
6887 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
6888 can quickly jump to every section.
6889
6890Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
6891commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
6892Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
6893reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
6894C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
6895
6896** Changes in BibTeX mode.
6897
6898*** Info documentation is now available.
6899
6900*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
6901both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
6902
6903*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
6904bibtex-user-optional-fields.
6905
6906*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
6907(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
6908
6909*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
6910entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
6911appropriate functions.
6912
6913*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
6914entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
6915
6916*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
6917been cleaned.
6918
6919*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
6920bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
6921
6922*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
6923shall be delimited.
6924
6925*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
6926bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
6927bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
6928
6929*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
6930field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
6931prefixed with `ALT'.
6932
6933*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
6934bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
6935formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
6936documentation).
6937
6938*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
6939documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
6940for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
6941
6942*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
6943comma should be inserted at end of last field.
6944
6945*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
6946alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
6947signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
6948
6949*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
6950
6951*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
6952
6953*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
6954from alien sources.
6955
6956*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
6957to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
6958crossref entries.
6959
6960*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
6961region.
6962
6963*** Added support for imenu.
6964
6965*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
6966of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
6967`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
6968`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
6969
6970*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
6971from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
6972
6973** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
6974
6975** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
6976
6977** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
6978functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
6979Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
6980as an argument.
6981
6982When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
6983and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
6984
6985** browse-url changes
6986
6987*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
6988Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
6989(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
6990non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
6991customization variables.
6992
6993*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
6994
6995*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
6996lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
6997(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
6998
6999** Changes in Ediff
7000
7001*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
7002pops up the Info file for this command.
7003
7004*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
7005the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
7006merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
7007directories).
7008
7009*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
7010and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
7011files in the same directory.
7012
7013*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
7014The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
7015related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
7016
7017** Changes in Viper
7018
7019*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
7020*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
7021 instead of vip-.
7022*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
7023*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
7024Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
7025*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
7026*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
7027*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
7028color when Viper is in insert state.
7029*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
7030Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
7031viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
7032
7033** Etags changes.
7034
7035*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
7036default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
7037Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
7038variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
7039not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
7040
7041*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
7042
7043*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
7044constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
7045
7046*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
7047recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
7048In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
7049
7050*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
7051C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
7052recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
7053methods and protocols.
7054
7055*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
7056.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
7057column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
7058paragraph name.
7059
7060*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
7061an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
7062at least M times and as many as N times.
7063
7064** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
7065in files has changed slightly.
7066
7067With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
7068time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
7069This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
7070with old time-stamp-format values.
7071
7072In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
7073(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
7074This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
7075reasons.
7076
7077In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
7078natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
7079fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
7080(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
7081time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
7082specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
7083
7084Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
7085case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
7086truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
7087
7088The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
7089being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
7090future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
7091recommended now will continue to work then.
7092
7093See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
7094details.
7095
7096** There are some additional major modes:
7097
7098dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
7099m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
7100meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
7101
7102** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
7103copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
7104into Emacs.
7105
7106** New Lisp packages include:
7107
7108*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
7109
7110*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
7111be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
7112
7113*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
7114
7115*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
7116in shell buffers.
7117
7118*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
7119See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
7120and `elint-defun'.
7121
7122*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
7123meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
7124ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
7125strings or comments.
7126
7127These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
7128abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
7129you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
7130insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
7131at these points.
7132
7133*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
7134can visit them by short forms of their names.
7135
7136*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
7137Emacs Lisp function at point.
7138
7139*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
7140
7141*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
7142switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
7143
7144*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
7145
7146*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
7147
7148*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
7149
7150*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
7151from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
7152
7153*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
7154You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
7155inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
7156original place after inserting the copy.
7157
7158*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
7159on the buffer.
7160
7161You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
7162velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
7163(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
7164
7165Enable mouse-drag with:
7166 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
7167-or-
7168 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
7169
7170*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
7171mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
7172
7173*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
7174It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
7175
7176*** ogonek
7177
7178The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
7179Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
7180platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
7181TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
7182ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
7183prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
7184instance) and vice versa.
7185
7186To use this package load it using
7187 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
7188Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
7189 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
7190 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
7191The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
7192ways of customization in `.emacs'.
7193
7194*** Interface to ph.
7195
7196Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
7197
7198The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
7199services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
7200these servers.
7201
7202*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
7203
7204*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
7205You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
7206while the real cursor does not move.
7207
7208*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
7209for visiting your favorite web sites.
7210
7211*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
7212so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
7213
7214** movemail change
7215
7216Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
7217mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
7218supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
7219user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
7220
7221This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
7222\f
7223* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
7224
7225** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
7226
7227Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
7228end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
7229Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
7230file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
7231file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
7232
7233To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
7234C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
7235coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
7236specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
7237LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
7238save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
7239\f
7240* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
7241
7242** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
7243Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
7244vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
7245Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
7246
7247** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
7248to start with w32- instead of win32-.
7249
7250In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
7251don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
7252"win".
7253
7254** Basic Lisp changes
7255
7256*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
7257evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
7258
7259*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
7260be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
7261or by the user.
7262
7263The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7264
7265*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7266
7267(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7268(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7269
7270*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7271usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7272its argument.
7273
7274*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7275
7276*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7277
7278*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7279
7280*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7281error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7282include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7283`format' function.
7284
7285*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7286or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7287whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7288
7289*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7290either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7291adding one of these suffixes.
7292
7293*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7294which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7295If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7296
7297We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7298because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7299
7300*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7301
7302*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7303You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7304
7305*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7306conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7307
7308 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7309
7310BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7311BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7312
7313*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7314choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7315restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7316works using `save-current-buffer'.
7317
7318*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7319write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7320of the last form.
7321
7322*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7323which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7324last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7325as the last form.
7326
7327*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7328characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7329matches.
7330
7331For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7332
7333*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7334with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7335Then it returns that string.
7336
7337For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7338
7339(with-output-to-string
7340 (princ "The buffer is ")
7341 (princ (buffer-name)))
7342
7343returns "The buffer is foo".
7344
7345** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7346is non-nil.
7347
7348These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7349buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7350characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7351
7352*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7353a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7354
7355Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7356character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7357Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7358position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7359characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7360 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7361
7362ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7363Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7364non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7365characters".
7366
7367The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7368through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7369"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7370range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7371leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7372
7373*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7374(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7375multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7376character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7377
7378This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7379always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7380
7381However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7382
7383*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7384because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7385have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7386the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7387guaranteed.
7388
7389*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7390between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7391character).
7392
7393When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7394
7395 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7396 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7397 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7398 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7399 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7400
7401*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7402
7403*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7404`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
7405more than the number of characters.
7406
7407You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
7408it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
7409\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
7410is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
7411follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
7412newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
7413
7414*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
7415and returns a string containing those characters.
7416
7417*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
7418(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
7419counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
7420character, sref signals an error.
7421
7422*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
7423in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
7424string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7425
7426*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
7427in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
7428region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7429
7430*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
7431the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
7432to a vector of the characters in it.
7433
7434*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
7435of a string. You call it as follows:
7436
7437 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
7438
7439This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
7440STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
7441This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
7442Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
7443it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
7444
7445*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
7446if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7447
7448*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
7449if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7450
7451*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
7452to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
7453not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
7454which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
7455
7456(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
7457
7458This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
7459
7460The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
7461If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
7462are not included in the resulting value.
7463
7464The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
7465at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
7466WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
7467is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
7468
7469If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
7470place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
7471character extends across that column), then the padding character
7472PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
7473string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
7474column START-COLUMN.
7475
7476*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
7477the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
7478necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
7479difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
7480changed text, before the change.
7481
7482*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
7483sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
7484one character set for each script, not for each language.
7485
7486**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
7487
7488**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
7489
7490**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
7491set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
7492
7493**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
7494name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
7495which identify the character within that character set.
7496
7497**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
7498byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
7499opposite of split-char.
7500
7501**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
7502of all the characters between BEG and END.
7503
7504**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
7505of all the characters in a string.
7506
7507*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
7508and specifying coding systems.
7509
7510**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
7511system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
7512of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
7513(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
7514and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
7515as what to do about code conversion.)
7516
7517**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
7518name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
7519
7520**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7521for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7522except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
7523
7524Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7525which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
7526to match against a file name.
7527
7528VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7529a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7530decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7531to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7532systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7533specifies the coding system for encoding.
7534
7535If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7536or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7537
7538**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
7539the coding system to use for network sockets.
7540
7541Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7542which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
7543either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
7544service names.
7545
7546VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7547a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7548decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7549to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7550systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7551specifies the coding system for encoding.
7552
7553If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7554or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7555
7556**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7557for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7558except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
7559start the subprocess.
7560
7561**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
7562systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
7563when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
7564(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
7565to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
7566
7567**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
7568coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
7569subprocess.
7570
7571It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
7572but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
7573start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
7574connection permanently or until overridden.
7575
7576The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
7577file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
7578network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
7579coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
7580It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
7581system for one operation at a time.
7582
7583**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
7584files, subprocesses or network connections.
7585
7586**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
7587coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
7588The value is a cons cell,
7589 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
7590where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
7591the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
7592input to the subprocess.
7593
7594**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
7595change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
7596
7597** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
7598customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
7599you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
7600
7601You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
7602variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
7603information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
7604legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
7605customization.
7606
7607Thus, instead of writing
7608
7609 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
7610 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
7611
7612you would now write this:
7613
7614 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
7615 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
7616 :type 'boolean
7617 :group foo)
7618
7619The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
7620two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
7621describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
7622for a description of them.
7623
7624The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
7625should belong to. You define a new group like this:
7626
7627 (defgroup ispell nil
7628 "Spell checking using Ispell."
7629 :group 'processes)
7630
7631The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
7632group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
7633but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
7634to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
7635second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
7636
7637Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
7638package should have just one group; a more complex package should
7639have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
7640package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
7641first-level subgroups.
7642
7643** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
7644
7645This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
7646separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
7647
7648** easy-mmode
7649
7650The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
7651developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
7652only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
7653predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
7654`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
7655`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
7656
7657** Text property changes
7658
7659*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
7660text property.
7661
7662*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
7663previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
7664place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
7665functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
7666starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
7667
7668If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
7669LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
7670of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
7671position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
7672
7673*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
7674value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
7675is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
7676
7677** Changes in invisibility features
7678
7679*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
7680hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
7681is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
7682should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
7683would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
7684make the overlay visible.
7685
7686During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
7687invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
7688needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
7689which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
7690the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
7691t when it should hide it.
7692
7693*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
7694
7695Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
7696invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
7697and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
7698Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
7699manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
7700Here is an example of how to do this:
7701
7702 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
7703 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7704 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
7705 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7706
7707 ...
7708 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
7709
7710 ...
7711 ;; When done with the overlays:
7712 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7713 ;; Or respectively:
7714 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7715
7716** Changes in syntax parsing.
7717
7718*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
7719`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
7720obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
7721`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
7722
7723If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
7724is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
7725used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
7726
7727When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
7728character in the buffer is calculated thus:
7729
7730 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
7731 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
7732
7733 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
7734 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
7735 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
7736
7737 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
7738 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
7739 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
7740 determine the syntax type of the character.
7741
7742 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
7743 of the current buffer.
7744
7745*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
7746value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
7747for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
7748
7749*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
7750and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
7751only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
7752character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
7753another character with the same code (unless quoted).
7754
7755These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
7756text property.
7757
7758*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
7759arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
7760of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
7761
7762*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
7763(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
7764element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
7765nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
7766string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
7767
7768*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
7769syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
7770`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
7771
7772** Changes in face features
7773
7774*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
7775if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
7776
7777*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
7778of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
7779
7780*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
7781set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
7782
7783*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
7784set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
7785
7786*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
7787by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
7788and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
7789the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
7790overlay property).
7791
7792This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
7793arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
7794
7795** Changes in file-handling functions
7796
7797*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
7798directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
7799they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
7800is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
7801
7802This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
7803begins with ~.
7804
7805*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
7806it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
7807
7808*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
7809the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
7810
7811*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
7812as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
7813
7814*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
7815character code conversion as well as other things.
7816
7817Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
7818(formerly it did not).
7819
7820*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
7821environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
7822
7823*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
7824instead of constant strings.
7825
7826*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
7827to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
7828any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
7829
7830substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
7831in the same way as before.
7832
7833*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
7834The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
7835which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
7836
7837*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
7838error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
7839else, and returns nil.
7840
7841*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
7842directory cannot be listed.
7843
7844** Changes in minibuffer input
7845
7846*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
7847read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
7848additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
7849argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
7850ways:
7851
7852 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
7853 It is available through the history command M-n.
7854
7855*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
7856read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
7857argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
7858minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
7859enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
7860
7861In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
7862argument in this way.
7863
7864*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
7865from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
7866minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
7867
7868** Echo area features
7869
7870*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
7871echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
7872minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
7873after the echo area is cleared.
7874
7875*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
7876in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
7877
7878** Keyboard input features
7879
7880*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
7881set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
7882
7883*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
7884received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
7885by keyboard macros.
7886
7887** Frame-related changes
7888
7889*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
7890creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
7891hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
7892
7893*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
7894the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
7895has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
7896
7897*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
7898selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
7899value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
7900in the selected frame.
7901
7902*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
7903is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
7904which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
7905
7906** X Windows features
7907
7908*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
7909x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
7910x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
7911
7912*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
7913The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
7914
7915*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
7916MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
7917A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
7918
7919If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
7920it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
7921
7922** Subprocess features
7923
7924*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
7925functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
7926automatically.
7927
7928*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
7929and returns the output from the command as a string.
7930
7931*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
7932and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
7933
7934** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
7935does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
7936
7937** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
7938at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
7939goes after the other menu items.
7940
7941** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
7942of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
7943around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
7944are in use.
7945
7946The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
7947series of several changes--if that seems safe.
7948
7949Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
7950after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
7951form.
7952
7953** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
7954is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
7955but its hook is still run.
7956
7957** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
7958for errors that are handled by condition-case.
7959
7960If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
7961regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
7962useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
7963
7964This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
7965are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
7966filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
7967warned.
7968
7969** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
7970way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
7971
7972** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
7973integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
7974functions like display-time.
7975
7976** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
7977name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
7978
7979** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
7980can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
7981is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
7982
7983** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
7984if there is an error in compilation.
7985
7986** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
7987switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
7988argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
7989they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
7990
7991** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
7992Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
7993the *scratch* buffer.
7994
7995** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
7996The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
7997where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
7998e.g., in Font Lock mode.
7999
8000** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
8001and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
8002It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
8003
8004** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
8005using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
8006variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
8007and compose-mail-other-frame.
8008
8009** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
8010can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
8011full name of the specified user will be returned.
8012
8013** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
8014of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
8015where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
8016in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
8017option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
8018files at all.
8019
8020** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
8021and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
8022width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
8023the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
8024
8025For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
8026minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
8027with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
8028is how %S normally pads to two positions.
8029
8030** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
8031
8032** imenu.el changes.
8033
8034You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
8035item from menu created by imenu.
8036
8037An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
8038#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
8039select one of those items.
8040\f
8041* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
8042\f
8043* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
8044
8045** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
8046mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
8047
8048** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
8049use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
8050Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
8051\f
8052* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
8053
8054** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
8055To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
8056
8057** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
8058conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
8059matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
8060expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
8061word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
8062all caps.
8063
8064** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
8065at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
8066
8067When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
8068does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
8069as in previous Emacs versions.
8070
8071** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
8072non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
8073time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
8074frames.
8075
8076** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
8077if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
8078This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
8079Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
8080accident.
8081
8082** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
8083keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
8084It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
8085line and then executing the macro.
8086
8087This command is not new, but was never documented before.
8088
8089** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
8090(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
8091characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
8092characters.
8093
8094** Font Lock mode
8095
8096*** Font Lock support modes
8097
8098Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
8099below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
8100hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
8101to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
8102Font Lock mode is enabled.
8103
8104For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
8105
8106 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
8107
8108in your ~/.emacs.
8109
8110*** lazy-lock
8111
8112The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
8113only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
8114becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
8115Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
8116occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
8117buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
8118Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
8119
8120To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
8121
8122 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
8123
8124To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
8125
8126** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8127
8128*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
8129paren and key.
8130
8131*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
8132supported.
8133
8134** Gnus changes.
8135
8136Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
8137commands and variables have been added. There should be no
8138significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
8139previously released version, except in the message composition area.
8140
8141Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
8142between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
8143
8144*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
8145variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
8146obsolete.
8147
8148*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
8149missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
8150
8151 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
8152
8153*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
8154
8155 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
8156
8157*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
8158referred.
8159
8160*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
8161
8162 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
8163
8164*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
8165
8166 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
8167
8168*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
8169buffers.
8170
8171 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
8172
8173*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
8174
8175 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
8176
8177*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
8178
8179 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
8180
8181*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
8182
8183 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
8184
8185*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
8186is possible.
8187
8188 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
8189
8190*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
8191groups of groups.
8192
8193*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
8194
8195*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
8196batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
8197
8198*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
8199
8200*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
8201
8202*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
8203
8204 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
8205
8206*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
8207expiration times.
8208
8209*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
8210
8211*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
8212process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
8213
8214*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
8215articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
8216bound to keys on the `/' submap.
8217
8218*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
8219articles with the `*' command.
8220
8221*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
8222
8223*** Article headers can be buttonized.
8224
8225 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
8226
8227*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
8228
8229*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
8230`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
8231
8232*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
8233buffer.
8234
8235*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
8236
8237*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
8238
8239*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
8240
8241 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
8242
8243*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
8244
8245 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
8246
8247*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
8248
8249*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
8250
8251*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
8252
8253 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
8254 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
8255
8256*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
8257refetching.
8258
8259 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
8260
8261*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
8262buffer to allow easier treatment.
8263
8264*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
8265
8266*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
8267
8268 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
8269
8270*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
8271articles.
8272
8273 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
8274
8275*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
8276
8277*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8278cited text to hide is now customizable.
8279
8280 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8281
8282*** Boring headers can be hidden.
8283
8284 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8285
8286*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8287
8288*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8289
8290The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8291in greater detail.
8292\f
8293* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8294
8295** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8296second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8297asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8298exists.
8299
8300** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8301as well as lists.
8302
8303** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8304of a given keymap.
8305
8306** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8307given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8308keymap or nil.
8309
8310** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8311an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8312name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8313menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8314equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8315alias.
8316\f
8317* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8318
8319** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8320
8321Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8322This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8323was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8324far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8325pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8326
8327For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8328you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8329`http://www.vtw.org/'.
8330
8331** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8332
8333The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8334do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8335It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8336much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8337chapter of the manual for details.
8338
8339However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8340customization variables take effect.
8341
8342** Marking with the mouse.
8343
8344When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8345highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8346using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8347
8348** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8349
8350*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8351
8352*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8353to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8354
8355*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8356in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8357you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8358application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8359applications, these problems are significant.
8360
8361If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8362likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8363However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8364will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8365other DOS application as a subprocess.
8366
8367Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8368You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8369
8370If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8371subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8372have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8373Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8374separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8375Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8376
8377** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8378
8379This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8380which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8381minibuffer contains.
8382
8383** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8384
8385The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8386It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8387It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8388affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8389
8390The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8391it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8392and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8393when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8394
8395** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8396enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8397
8398** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8399F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8400Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8401
8402If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8403menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8404something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
8405the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
8406
8407 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
8408
8409** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
8410to replace the characters it "deletes".
8411
8412** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
8413
8414** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
8415a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
8416select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
8417It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
8418immediately after the selected one.
8419
8420This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
8421made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
8422
8423** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
8424
8425Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
8426directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
8427If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
8428Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
8429recover-session.
8430
8431You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
8432auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
8433will not work.
8434
8435Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
8436normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
8437this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
8438bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
8439now that the bug is fixed.
8440
8441** Changes to Version Control (VC)
8442
8443There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
8444when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
8445Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
8446which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
8447
8448If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
8449telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
8450VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
8451the link is visited and a warning displayed.
8452
8453** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
8454Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
8455is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
8456
8457There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
8458Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
8459enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
8460The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
8461remain normal.
8462
8463** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
8464header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
8465
8466Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
8467known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
8468offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
8469Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
8470
8471Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
8472of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
8473a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
8474name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
8475documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
8476`mail-directory-stream'.)
8477
8478** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
8479skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
8480characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
8481with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
8482
8483Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
8484- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
8485wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
8486
8487The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
8488less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
8489headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
8490Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
8491Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
8492fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
8493to a limitation in font-lock).
8494
8495External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
8496
8497** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
8498buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
8499buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
8500this example:
8501
8502 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
8503 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
8504
8505** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8506
8507*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
8508
8509*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
8510
8511*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
8512
8513*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
8514entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
8515will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
8516isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
8517(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
8518The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
8519
8520*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
8521does the same job.
8522
8523*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
8524"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
8525
8526*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
8527text.
8528
8529** Font Lock mode
8530
8531*** Global Font Lock mode
8532
8533Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
8534new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
8535font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
8536turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
8537on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
8538
8539For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
8540
8541 (global-font-lock-mode t)
8542
8543in your ~/.emacs.
8544
8545*** Local Refontification
8546
8547In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
8548However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
8549those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
8550command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
8551
8552In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
8553(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
8554current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
8555above and below point.
8556
8557With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
8558
8559** Follow mode
8560
8561Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
8562buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
8563side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
8564they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
8565split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
8566follow-mode.
8567
8568M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
8569
8570To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
8571command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
8572
8573** hide-show changes.
8574
8575The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
8576to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
8577normal hooks.
8578
8579** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
8580The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
8581
8582** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
8583recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
8584those that begin a function, record, or macro.
8585
8586** MSDOS Changes
8587
8588*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
8589Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
8590
8591*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
8592and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
8593
8594*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
8595
8596*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
8597pressing both mouse buttons.
8598
8599*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
8600restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
8601are:
8602
8603**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
8604now works.
8605
8606**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
8607
8608**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
8609implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
8610
8611**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
8612
8613**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
8614
8615**** `M-x recover-session' works.
8616
8617**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
8618
8619**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
8620\f
8621* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
8622
8623** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
8624tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
8625remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
8626this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
8627behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
8628
8629** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
8630
8631The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
8632not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
8633need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
8634be different.
8635
8636It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
8637than `system-type'.
8638
8639See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
8640
8641** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
8642now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
8643
8644** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
8645that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
8646
8647** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
8648no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
8649reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
8650
8651The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
8652to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
8653like this:
8654
8655 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8656
8657SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
8658It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
8659becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
8660
8661REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
8662seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
8663means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
8664
8665*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
8666up if too much time passes.
8667
8668 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
8669
8670This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
8671If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
8672of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
8673form in BODY.
8674
8675*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
8676a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
8677call looks like this:
8678
8679 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8680
8681SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
8682runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
8683timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
8684ARGS.
8685
8686Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
8687command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
8688command.
8689
8690REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
8691time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
8692does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
8693each time Emacs becomes idle.
8694
8695If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
8696idle for SECS seconds.
8697
8698*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
8699all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
8700programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
8701instead.
8702
8703*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
8704there is no answer within a certain time.
8705
8706 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
8707
8708asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
8709within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
8710Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
8711
8712** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
8713arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
8714meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
8715arguments in between are ignored.
8716
8717This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
8718the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
8719
8720** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
8721/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
8722/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
8723site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
8724version.
8725
8726It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
8727version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
8728for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
8729has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
8730and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
8731problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
8732
8733** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
8734.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
8735systems with limited file name syntax.
8736
8737Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
8738convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
8739for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
8740completions.el:
8741
8742(defvar save-completions-file-name
8743 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
8744 "*The filename to save completions to.")
8745
8746This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
8747depends on the operating system, because the definition of
8748convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
8749Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
8750MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
8751
8752** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
8753rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
8754minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
8755
8756** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
8757marker from its buffer position.
8758
8759** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
8760Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
8761The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
8762
8763** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
8764that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
8765condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
8766of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
8767matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
8768regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
8769
8770This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
8771errors that happen often during editing.
8772
8773** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
8774into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
8775puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
8776
8777** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
8778now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
8779
8780** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
8781a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
8782name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
8783to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
8784and not get-buffer-window.
8785
8786** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
8787calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
8788being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
8789
8790If you use this feature, you should set the variable
8791buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
8792property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
8793non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
8794are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
8795property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
8796over and over for the same text.
8797
8798** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
8799
8800*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
8801in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
8802
8803;; @(#) HEADER: text
8804;; $HEADER: text $
8805
8806in addition to the normal
8807
8808;; HEADER: text
8809
8810*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
8811checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
8812lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
8813
8814
a933dad1 8815\f
3787e12e 8816* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
8817
8818----------------------------------------------------------------------
8819Copyright information:
8820
424d8b44 8821Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
8822
8823 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
8824 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
8825 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
8826 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
8827
8828 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
8829 of this document, or of portions of it,
8830 under the above conditions, provided also that they
8831 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
8832\f
8833Local variables:
8834mode: outline
8835paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
8836end: